issue for bid – volume 3 of 3 – specification divisions 21

Project: Hanson Park Health Center

5501 W. Fullerton Ave., Chicago, IL 60639Contract No. H19-0010

PROJECT MANUAL

For The: Cook County Health & Hospitals System Department of Facilities

Under:Board of Directors of the Cook County Health & Hospitals System

Issued By:Office of the Chief Procurement Officer Supply Chain Management

Issue for Bid – June 25, 2019

BID DEPOSIT TO BE 1% OF TOTAL BID BIDS TO BE EXECUTED IN TRIPLICATE

ALL SIGNATURES TO BE SWORN TO BEFORE A NOTARY PUBLIC

VOLUME 3 OF 3 – SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS 21 THROUGH 33

Prepared By:

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT 21 0513 - 1

SECTION 210513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level.



B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.



3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 210513


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 0517 - 1

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 6. Silicone sealants.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-

emitting materials.

3.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop.



B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

D. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured, Dura-coated or Duco-coated cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig (137 kPa) minimum. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size. 4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Stainless steel. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B633

Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.

B. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.



D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.6 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.



2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Use silicone sealant to seal around the outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- or smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.



B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Use grout or silicone sealant, to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron pipe sleeves Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves Steel pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.




3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Sleeve-seal fittings.


b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Sleeve-seal fittings.


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Steel pipe sleeves Stack-sleeve fittings Sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves Stack-sleeve fittings.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 0518 - 1

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company. 2. Dearborn Brass. 3. Jones Stephens Corp. 4. Keeney Manufacturing Company (The). 5. Mid-America Fittings, Inc. 6. ProFlo; a Ferguson Enterprises, Inc. brand.

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.



B. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

D. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.

2.3 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Steel with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Insulated Piping: One-piece stainless steel with polished stainless-steel finish. e. Insulated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel

with polished, chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stainless

steel with polished stainless-steel finish. h. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast

brass with polished, chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with

polished, chrome-plated finish. j. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with

polished, chrome-plated finish. k. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-

plated finish. l. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with rough-brass

finish.



m. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate. 2. Existing Piping: Split floor plate.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 21 0523 - 1

SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Two-piece ball valves with indicators. 2. Bronze butterfly valves with indicators. 3. Iron butterfly valves with indicators. 4. Check valves. 5. Bronze OS&Y gate valves. 6. Iron OS&Y gate valves. 7. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

B. NRS: Nonrising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:



1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings listed below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.

a. Level 1: HCBZ - Gate Valve. b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.

1) Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control. 2) Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves. 3) Level 3: HMER - Check Valves. 4) Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.

2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.

a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim and Drain.

B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems: a. Valves.

1) Gate valves. 2) Check valves.

a) Single check valves.

3) Miscellaneous valves.

C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.

D. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.



2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.

G. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as required by system pressures.

H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

2.2 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS

A. Description:

1. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Body Design: Two piece. 4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. 5. Port Size: Full or standard. 6. Seats: PTFE. 7. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel. 8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 10. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 11. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) through NPS 2 (DN 50): Threaded ends. 12. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Grooved ends.

2.3 BRONZE BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS

A. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.

2. Minimum: Pressure rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Body Material: Bronze. 4. Seat Material: EPDM. 5. Stem Material: Bronze or stainless steel. 6. Disc: Stainless steel with EPDM coating.



7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 9. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) through NPS 2 (DN 50): Threaded ends. 10. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Grooved ends.

2.4 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS

A. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating. 4. Seat Material: EPDM. 5. Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated. 7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

2.5 CHECK VALVES

A. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Type: Single swing check. 4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze. 5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal. 6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel. 8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel. 9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.6 BRONZE OS&Y GATE VALVES

A. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Bronze or brass. 4. Wedge: One-piece bronze or brass. 5. Wedge Seat: Bronze. 6. Stem: Bronze or brass. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External.



9. End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES

A. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. 5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. 6. Stem: Brass or bronze. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External. 9. End Connections: Flanged Grooved.

2.8 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves: 1. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). b. Body Design: Two piece. c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. d. Port size: Full or standard. e. Seats: PTFE. f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel. g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. h. Actuator: Handlever. i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) through NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65):

Threaded ends. j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 65):

Grooved ends.

B. Angle Valves: 1. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). b. Body Material: Brass or bronze. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Stem: Bronze. e. Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation requirements and applications:

1. Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for application of valves in fire-suppression water-service piping outside the building.

2. Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for application of valves in fire-suppression standpipes.

3. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems.

4. Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

D. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.



G. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 210553 "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system controlled by each valve.

H. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections.

I. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

21 0529 - 1

SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 210516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

3. Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



21 0529 - 2

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved for fire-suppression piping support.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot-dip galvanized. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:



21 0529 - 3

1. Description: Copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved for fire-suppression piping support.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Flex-Strut Inc. c. G-Strut. d. Haydon Corporation. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. f. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc. 9. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Anvil International. b. CADDY; a brand of nVent. c. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. d. Empire Industries, Inc. e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.



21 0529 - 4


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: No coating Plain. 9. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane.

2.5 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS


1. CADDY; a brand of nVent. 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 4. Pipe Shields Inc. 5. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 6. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi (688-kPa) or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.



21 0529 - 5

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel. 3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.

2.8 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.



21 0529 - 6

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal strut systems.

D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in accordance with approvals and listings.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.



21 0529 - 7

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch

(2.67 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.



21 0529 - 8

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.



21 0529 - 9

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use pipe hangers and corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).

5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).

6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



21 0529 - 10

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements.

L. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

M. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

21 0548.13 - 1

SECTION 210548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 5. Resilient pipe guides. 6. Elastomeric hangers.


1. Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for devices for plumbing equipment and systems.

2. Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC" for devices for HVAC equipment and systems.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.



21 0548.13 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for fire-suppression piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: .


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. CADDY; a brand of nVent. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P. g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Management Corp. i. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.



21 0548.13 - 3

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: .


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. CADDY; a brand of nVent. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P. g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Isolation. i. Vibration Management Corp. j. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: .


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. CADDY; a brand of nVent. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P. g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Isolation. i. Vibration Management Corp. j. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.



21 0548.13 - 4

b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.4 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig (3.45 MPa) on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.

2.5 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: .


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. CADDY; a brand of nVent. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Novia; A Division of C&P. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation. h. Vibration Management Corp. i. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.



21 0548.13 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

END OF SECTION 210548.13


IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 - 1

SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:


a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP.



d. Champion America. e. Craftmark Pipe Markers. f. emedco. g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Red. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. Champion America. 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 6. emedco. 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. National Marker Company. 10. Seton Identification Products. 11. Stranco, Inc.



B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Champion America. 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 7. emedco. 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Sevices Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.



E. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red. 2. Letter Color: White.

2.4 VALVE TAGS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Champion America. 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 7. emedco. 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Sevices Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products.

B. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain or S-hook. 3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red. 4. Letter Color: White.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



2.5 WARNING TAGS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. Champion America. 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 6. emedco. 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Sevices Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products.

B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm). 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.



B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 2 inches (50 mm), round. b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches (50 mm), round. c. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches (50 mm), round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 1100 - 1

SECTION 211100 - FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components outside the building and service entrance piping through floor into the building and the following:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-suppression specialty valves. 3. Protective enclosures. 4. Alarm devices.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that are furnished to the site, ready for installation.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 211116 "Facility Fire Hydrants" for AWWA and UL-listed, dry- and wet-barrel fire hydrants.

2. Section 211119 "Fire-Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type, fire-department connections.

3. Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for fire-suppression standpipes inside the building.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying the water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with FM Global's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.



D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

C. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Standard: UL 213. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and

EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.

B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end.



C. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end.

D. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. b. Victaulic Company. c. Viking Corporation.

2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

E. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

F. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

G. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:




a. EBAA Iron, Inc. 2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and one or two flexing

sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105.

B. Material: Linear low-density PE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Gaskets for Ferrous Piping and Copper-Alloy Tubing: ASME B16.21, asbestos free.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:


a. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. JCM Industries, Inc. d. Romac Industries, Inc. e. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners, and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.

3. Standard: AWWA C219.



4. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Carbon steel Ductile iron. 5. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 6. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. 7. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.7 CORPORATION VALVES


1. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. 2. Jones, James Company. 3. Master Meter, Inc. 4. Mueller Co.

B. Meter Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure, service-line valves. Include angle- or straight-through-pattern bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

2.8 CURB VALVES


1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). 2. Jones, James Company. 3. Master Meter, Inc. 4. Mueller Co. 5. Red Hed Manufacturing Company; a division of Everett J. Prescott, Inc.

B. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure, service-line valves. Valve has bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, wide tee head, and inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

C. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter.

1. Shutoff Rods: Steel; with tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.

D. Meter Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure, service-line valves. Include angle- or straight-through-pattern bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.



2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers: 1. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or FM

Global's "Approval Guide." 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. 4. Size: 6 NPS. 5. Design Flow Rate: 500 gpm. 6. Body Material: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is

FDA approved Steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved Stainless steel.

7. End Connections: Flanged. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 9. Accessories:

a. Valves: UL 262 and FM Global's "Approval Guide" listing; OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.

B. Backflow Preventer Test Kits:


a. FEBCO; A WATTS Brand. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.

2.10 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES

A. Freeze-Protection Enclosures: 1. Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping,

equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F (minus 36 deg C).

2. Standard: ASSE 1060. 3. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum breakers. 4. Class I-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices. Include

drain opening in housing.

a. Housing: Reinforced-aluminum or -fiberglass construction.

1) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit.

2) Drain opening for units with drain connection.



3) Access doors with locking devices. 4) Insulation inside housing. 5) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

b. Electric heating cable or heater with self-limiting temperature control.

2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: UL 753 and FM Global's "Approval Guide" listing, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.

B. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) working pressure; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed.

C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position.

D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with water utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.



5. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company's standards.

6. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves.

7. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

8. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 9. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. 10. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

1. Install encasement for piping according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105.

F. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm), with top at least 12 inches (300 mm) below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (910 mm) of cover over top. 2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) of additional cover.

G. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

H. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping within the building at the floor slab until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building's fire-suppression water-service piping systems when those systems are installed.

I. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

J. Comply with requirements for fire-suppression water-service piping inside the building in the following Sections:

1. Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" 2. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 3. Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems"

K. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."



M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

G. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.

I. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure.

J. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

3.4 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Heat-fused joints. 6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches in fire-suppression water-service piping according to NFPA 24 and the following:



1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

C. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

D. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

G. Support valves and piping, not direct buried, on concrete piers. Comply with requirements for concrete piers in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.6 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install in vault or aboveground.

B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.

C. Support detector check valves and piping on concrete piers. Comply with requirements for concrete piers in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.



3.8 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete base level and with top approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above grade.

B. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment.

C. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.

3.9 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire-department connection to mains.

3.10 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.

B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.

1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke.

C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows:

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.

D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.

E. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.

F. Connect alarm devices to building's fire-alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are specified in Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems." Section 284621.13 "Conventional Fire-Alarm Systems."

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve service clamp and corporation valve. Refer to Civil drawings and specifications.

B. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.




A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described below.

B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times the working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to zero psig (zero kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for 24 hours.

b. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

c. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.



3.15 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground fire-suppression water-service piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300) shall be the following:

1. Grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile- or gray-iron, standard-pattern or ductile-iron, compact-pattern fittings; glands, gaskets, and bolts; and gasketed joints.

3. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; push-on-joint, ductile-iron compact-pattern fittings; and gasketed joints.

B. Aboveground fire-suppression water-service piping NPS 5 to NPS 12 (DN 125 to DN 300) shall be grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

C. Underslab fire-suppression water-service piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300) shall be the following:

1. Grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-end, ductile-iron pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile- or gray-iron, standard-pattern or ductile-iron, compact-pattern fittings; glands, gaskets, and bolts; and restrained, gasketed joints.

3. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; push-on-joint, ductile-iron compact-pattern fittings; and restrained, gasketed joints.

3.16 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Underground fire-suppression water-service shutoff valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger shall be the following:

1. 200-psig (1380-kPa), AWWA, iron, nonrising-stem, metal resilient-seated gate valves. 2. 250-psig (1725-kPa), AWWA, iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valves. 3. 250-psig (1725-kPa), UL-listed or FM Global-approved, iron, nonrising-stem gate valves.

B. Standard-pressure, aboveground fire-suppression water-service shutoff valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger shall be the following:

1. 200-psig (1380-kPa), AWWA, iron, OS&Y, metal resilient-seated gate valves. 2. 250-psig (1725-kPa), AWWA, iron, OS&Y, resilient-seated gate valves. 3. 175-psig (1200-kPa), UL-listed or FM Global-approved, iron, OS&Y gate valves. 4. UL-listed or FM Global-approved butterfly valves.

C. Fire-suppression water-service check valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger shall be one of the following:

1. AWWA or UL-listed or FM Global-approved check valves.



2. UL-listed or FM Global-approved detector check valves.



FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 21 1119 - 1

SECTION 211119 – FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Flush-type fire-department connections.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION


1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet. 2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 4. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Standard: UL 405.

C. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.


FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 21 1119 - 2

F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.

G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

H. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.

I. Outlet: With pipe threads.

J. Body Style: Horizontal.

K. Number of Inlets: Two.

L. Outlet Location: Back.

M. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."

N. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.

O. Outlet Size: NPS 4 (DN 100).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping connections before fire-department connection installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install yard-type fire-department connections in concrete slab support. Comply with requirements for concrete in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.



WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Cover system for sprinkler piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Alarm devices. 6. Manual control stations. 7. Control panels. 8. Pressure gages.


1. Section 211119 "Fire Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire department connections.

2. Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping" for ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator, and trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig (1200 kPa), but not higher than 250 psig (1725 kPa).

B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.




1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. Compressed air piping. 3. HVAC hydronic piping. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Design Data:

1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field Test Reports:

1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

2. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field quality-control reports.



1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 13R.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.

C. High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure.

D. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: 1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 5) Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (4.1 mm/min. over 139-

sq. m) area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (6.1 mm/min.

over 139-sq. m) area. c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (8.1 mm/min.

over 139-sq. m) area. d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (12.2 mm/min. over

232-sq. m) area. e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (16.3 mm/min. over

232-sq. m) area. f. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm (6.1 mm/min.) over entire area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm (8.1 mm/min.) over entire area. c. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm (12.2 mm/min.) over entire area. d. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm (16.3 mm/min.) over entire area.



e. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. (20.9 sq. m). b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard-Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M; ASTM A795/A795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M wrought steel, with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M or ASTM A795/A795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 (DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 (DN 150 to DN 250), plain end.

D. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free or EPDM rubber gasket.

a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type

gaskets.

2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

H. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International. b. Smith-Cooper International. c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.



d. Victaulic Company. 2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 3. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron casting or

ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

I. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM Global-approved, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Alarm Valves:


a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. d. Victaulic Company. e. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 193. 3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation. 4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure

gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer. 5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping. 6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. 7. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:




a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

2. Standard: UL 1726. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.4 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Anvil International. c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." 3. Pressure Rating: [175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum] [300 psig (2070 kPa)]. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.

C. Branch Line Testers:




a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 4. Body Material: Brass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:


a. Aegis Technologies, Inc. b. CECA, LLC. c. CPS Products, Inc. d. Merit Manufacturing.

2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Pressure Rating: 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Length: Adjustable. 7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.5 SPRINKLERS




1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). 3. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. 4. Victaulic Company. 5. Viking Corporation.

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.

D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6,

and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated.

F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

G. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.6 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell: 1. Standard: UL 464. 2. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. 3. Size: 8-inch (200-mm) minimum- 10-inch (250-mm) diameter. 4. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.



5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:


a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. b. Viking Corporation. c. WATTS.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated. 6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). 7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Pressure Switches:


a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in




2.7 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide" for hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve.

B. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.8 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves.

1. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide" when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring.

2. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


B. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

C. Panels Components:

1. Power supply. 2. Battery charger. 3. Standby batteries. 4. Field-wiring terminal strip. 5. Electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell. 6. Lamp test facility. 7. Single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts. 8. Rectifier.

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. 2. AMETEK, Inc. 3. Ashcroft Inc. 4. Brecco Corporation.




C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig (0- to 1725-kPa) minimum.

E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for exterior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.

3.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-distribution piping.


A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.



C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

L. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices air compressors.

M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

N. Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Section 210533 "Heat Tracing for Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Section 210700 "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."




A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

J. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

K. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

L. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

M. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.



N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.6 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.


D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. 2. Install alarm valves with bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line

connection.

3.7 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. [[Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train]] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-maintenance pumps.


A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast-iron threaded fittings, and threaded grooved ends, grooved-end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.



D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.


3. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.


5. Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

E. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger, shall be one of the following: 1. Standard-weight or Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends;

uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Dry concealed sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. 2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. 3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. 4. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.



DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1316 - 1

SECTION 211316 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Alarm devices. 6. Manual control stations. 7. Control panels. 8. Pressure gages.


1. Section 211119 "Fire Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire department connections.

2. Section 210523 "Fire Protection Piping" for ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator, and trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum.




B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.




C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. Compressed air piping. 3. HVAC hydronic piping. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Design Data:

1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

E. Field Test Reports:

1. Fire-hydrant flow test report. 2. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as

described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.



1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.

B. Double-Interlock Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing low-pressure air. Actuation of a fire-detection system, located in same area as sprinklers, opens deluge valve, permitting water to flow into sprinkler piping. A closed solenoid valve in the sprinkler piping is opened by another fire-detection device; water will then discharge from opened sprinklers.


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:



1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 13R.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design dry-pipe sprinkler systems.

D. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. b. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. d. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (4.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m) area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (6.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m) area.

c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (8.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m) area.

d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (12.2 mm/min. over 232-sq. m) area.

e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. (16.3 mm/min. over 232-sq. m) area.

f. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. (20.9 sq. m). b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes. b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 to 90 minutes.




A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M; ASTM A795/A795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M wrought steel, with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.

E. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

H. Plain-End-Pipe Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter turn or screwed retainer pin to secure pipe in fitting.


a. Anvil International. b. Shurjoint-Apollo Piping Products USA Inc.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Smith-Cooper International. d. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: [175-psig (1200-kPa)] [250-psig (1725-kPa)] [300-psig (2070-kPa)] minimum.

3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.



2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Dry-Pipe Valves:


a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. d. Victaulic Company. e. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 260. 3. Design: Differential-pressure type. 4. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,

alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

5. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). 3) Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. 4) Victaulic Company. 5) Viking Corporation.

6. Standard: UL 260. 7. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping. 8. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass

valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) outlet pressure.

9. Air Compressor:

a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>



b. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

c. Motor Horsepower: Fractional. d. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.

G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

2. Standard: UL 1726. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.5 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

B. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Anvil International. c. Shurjoint-Apollo Piping Products USA Inc. d. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.



d. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

D. Branch Line Testers:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Brass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

F. Adjustable Drop Nipples:


a. Aegis Technologies, Inc. b. CECA, LLC. c. CPS Products, Inc. d. Merit Manufacturing.

2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Pressure Rating: 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM O-ring seals. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Length: Adjustable. 7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.6 SPRINKLERS


1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). 3. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. 4. Victaulic Company. 5. Viking Corporation.

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum.

D. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.

E. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6,

and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199.



3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.7 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. b. Notifier. c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

2. Standard: UL 464. 3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. 4. Size: 8-inch (200-mm) minimum 10-inch (250-mm) diameter. 5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use. 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


C. Pressure Switches: 1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature. 3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 4. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

D. Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Type: Electrically supervised. 3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 4. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

2.8 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves.

1. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide" when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring.

2. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application



B. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

C. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

D. Panels Components:

1. Power supply. 2. Battery charger. 3. Standby batteries. 4. Field-wiring terminal strip. 5. Electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell. 6. Lamp test facility. 7. Single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts. 8. Rectifier.

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. 2. AMETEK, Inc. 3. Ashcroft Inc. 4. Brecco Corporation. 5. WIKA Instrument Corporation.


C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig (0- to 1725-kPa) minimum.

E. Label: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.



B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with requirements in Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for exterior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-distribution piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.


A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.



G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or to outside building.

J. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls. 2. Electrical power system. 3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13. In seismic-rated areas, refer to Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

N. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

O. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices air compressors.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."


A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.



C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.6 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.


D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.



2. Install dry-pipe valves with trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. a. Install air-pressure maintenance device with shutoff valves to permit servicing

without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range; and 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure.

b. Install compressed-air-supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.

3.7 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run air compressors. 6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.



B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.


A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends, grooved-end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following:


2. Standard-weight Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with plain ends; plain-end-pipe fittings; and twist-locked joints.


D. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be one of the following:





3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Dry concealed sprinklers Dry pendent, recessed, flush,

and concealed sprinklers as indicated. 3. Wall Mounting: Dry sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing in Exterior Canopy: Dry concealed sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. 2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. 3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. 4. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.



ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 21 3113 - 1

SECTION 213113 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. In-line fire pumps. 2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties. 3. Flowmeter systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.



D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 20.

B. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum unless higher pressure rating is indicated.


2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested fire-pump and driver unit.

B. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire-pump and driver unit, with reinforcement to resist movement of pump during seismic events when base is anchored to building substrate.

C. Finish: Red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

2.3 IN-LINE FIRE PUMPS


1. A-C Fire Pump; a Xylem brand. 2. Patterson Pump Company; a Gorman-Rupp company. 3. Peerless Pump Company. 4. Pentair Pump Group.

B. Pump:

1. Standard: UL 448, for in-line pumps for fire service. 2. Casing: Radially split case, cast iron, with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. 4. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze. 5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.



a. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing. b. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn and bronze packing gland.

6. Mounting: Pump and driver shaft is vertical, with motor above pump and pump on base. Motor and pump rotating assembly shall be removable from top without removing the pump casing from the piping.

C. Coupling: None or rigid.

D. Driver:

1. Standard: UL 1004A. 2. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Rated Capacity: 500 gpm. 2. Total Rated Head: 66 psig. 3. Inlet Flange: Class 125. 4. Outlet Flange: Class 125. 5. Motor Horsepower: 20 hp. 6. Motor Speed: 3550 rpm. 7. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 208 V. b. Phase: Three. c. Hertz: 60. d. Full-Load Amperes: 60 A.

2.4 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump casing.

B. Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump discharge piping.

C. Relief Valves:


a. BERMAD Control Valves. b. CLA-VAL. c. WATTS. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-suppression water-supply piping.



D. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.

E. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.

F. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.

G. Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:

1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20. 2. Header Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, with ends threaded

according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings. 4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726. 5. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405; however, provide outlets without clappers instead of inlets.

b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.

c. Nipples: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe, with ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.

e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular. f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads. g. Exposed Parts Finish: Rough brass. h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

6. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405; however, provide outlets without clappers instead of inlets.

b. Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20. c. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; round. d. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains. e. Exposed Parts Finish: Rough brass. f. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

2.5 FLOWMETER SYSTEMS


1. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division. 2. Fire Research Corp. 3. Hydro Flow Products, Inc. 4. Victaulic Company.



B. Description: UL-listed or FM-Approved, fire-pump flowmeter system able to indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity.

C. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.

D. Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi unless otherwise indicated. Sensor size shall match pipe, tubing, flowmeter, and fittings.

E. Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) in diameter. Include bracket or device for wall mounting.

1. Tubing Package: NPS 1/8 or NPS 1/4 (DN 6 or DN 10) soft copper tubing with copper or brass fittings and valves.

F. Portable Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) in diameter and with two 12-foot- (3.7-m-) long hoses in carrying case.

2.6 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.


2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test" and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."

1. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.

B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment bases and anchorage provisions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.



B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fire-pump installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief valves, and related components.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install fire pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

C. Install fire-pump suction and discharge piping equal to or larger than sizes required by NFPA 20.

D. Support piping and pumps separately, so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.

E. Install valves that are same size as connecting piping. Comply with requirements for fire-protection valves specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."

F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge flange pressure-gage tappings. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."

G. Install piping hangers and supports, anchors, valves, gages, and equipment supports according to NFPA 20.

H. Install flowmeters and sensors. Install flowmeter-system components and make connections according to NFPA 20 and manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical Installer.

J. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.



3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.

B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.

C. Align piping connections.

D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and to tolerances specified by manufacturer.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping and valves specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.

D. Connect flowmeter-system meters, sensors, and valves to tubing.

E. Connect fire pumps to their controllers.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to NFPA 20.


A. Test each fire pump with its controller as a unit. Comply with requirements for electric-motor-driver fire-pump controllers specified in Section 262933 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. After installing components, assemblies, and equipment, including controller, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.



3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


D. Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to Owner.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps.



PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS 21 3413 - 1

SECTION 213413 - PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Regenerative-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps.


1. Section 262933 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers" for pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For pumps, accessories, and specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGENERATIVE-TURBINE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. AC Fire.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, close-coupled, single-stage, regenerative-turbine centrifugal pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; with pump and motor mounted horizontally.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded inlet and outlet. 2. Impeller: Bronze, balanced, and keyed to shaft. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel with deflector. 4. Shaft Sleeve: Bronze. 5. Seal: Mechanical type with spring-loaded rotating head.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller and at least 10 feet (3 m) long.

F. Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics.

G. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Rated Capacity: 5 gpm. 2. Working Pressure: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 3. Inlet Size: Threaded; 1 NPS. 4. Outlet Size: Threaded; 1 NPS. 5. Motor Horsepower: 1/2 HP. 6. Motor Speed: 3450 RPM. 7. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 120. b. Phases: Single. c. Hertz: 60.



2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.


1. Install regenerative-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 1.4. 2. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." a. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in

Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

b. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

c. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

d. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

e. Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts. f. Shim pumps as needed to make them level.

3. Install isolation valves in both inlet and outlet pipes near the pump. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:





3. Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 0513 - 1

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1.3 COORDINATION



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level.




2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS



C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.










2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS




2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.



2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS


1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.


C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.






EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0516 - 1

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rubber union connector packless expansion joints. 2. Rubber packless expansion joints. 3. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 4. Alignment guides and anchors. 5. Pipe loops and swing connections.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.




A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.





B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints RUEJ-01:


a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a VMC Group Company. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. General Rubber Corporation. e. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F (1035 kPa at 77 deg C), unless

otherwise indicated. 4. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

B. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints REJ-01:


a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a VMC Group Company. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Flex-Weld, Inc. e. Garlock Sealing Technologies. f. General Rubber Corporation. g. Metraflex Company (The). h. Proco Products, Inc.



i. Red Valve Company, Inc. j. Unaflex.

2. Standards: ASTM F1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-PSJ-703. 4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods. 5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods. 6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 150 psig (1035

kPa) at 220 deg F (104 deg C). 7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 140 psig (966

kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C). 8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 140 psig (966 kPa)

at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 9. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalis, or Chemicals: Butyl rubber. 10. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: Buna-N Chlorosulfonated

polyethylene synthetic rubber. 11. Material for Water: Butyl rubber Buna-N. 12. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

2.3 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS


1. Anvil International. 2. Shurjoint-Apollo Piping Products USA Inc. 3. Victaulic Company.

B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, couplings, and grooved joints.

C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.

D. Nipples: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved ends.

E. Couplings: Five, flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, Buna-N gasket suitable for diluted acid, alkaline fluids, and cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides AG-01:


a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.



c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. d. Flexicraft Industries. e. Flex-Weld, Inc. f. Mason Industries, Inc. g. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."

C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-PSJ-703.

D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping.



3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 6. Silicone sealants.




1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-

emitting materials.

3.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES




1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

E. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS


1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description: Manufactured, Dura-coated or Duco-coated cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig (137 kPa) minimum. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber High-temperature-silicone Nitrile (Buna N) interlocking

links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.



4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B633

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.

C. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



2.6 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Permathane®/Acryl-R®; ITW Polymers Sealants North America. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). e. The Dow Chemical Company.



2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

3.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


3.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.


a. Smooth-On. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.



1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.



B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Use [grout] [or] [silicone sealant] to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron pipe sleeves Sleeve-seal fittings. b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves Sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Sleeve-seal fittings.


b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system Sleeve-seal fittings.



1) Select sleeve size to allow for [1-inch (25-mm)] <Insert dimension> annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Sleeve-seal fittings.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for [1-inch (25-mm)] <Insert dimension> annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Sleeve-seal fittings.


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Steel pipe sleeves Stack-sleeve fittings Sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves Stack-sleeve fittings.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company. 2. Dearborn Brass. 3. Jones Stephens Corp. 4. Keeney Manufacturing Company (The). 5. Mid-America Fittings, Inc. 6. ProFlo; a Ferguson Enterprises, Inc. brand.

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS






D. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.


F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.

2.3 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece steel with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped

steel or split-plate, stamped steel with exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with rough-brass finish.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with rough-brass finish.



1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate.




A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.



METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Light-activated thermometers. 3. Thermowells. 4. Dial-type pressure gages. 5. Gage attachments. 6. Test plugs. 7. Test-plug kits. 8. Sight flow indicators.


1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.

2. Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water meters. 3. Section 221513 "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping" for compressed air gages.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Trerice, H. O. Co. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch (152-mm) nominal size. 4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F (deg C). 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

B. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. e. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. f. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F (deg C). 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.


9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.



10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. d. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Case: Metal; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Scale(s): Deg F (Deg C). 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.


7. Display: Digital. 8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1 deg C).

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1 (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25),

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw

threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.



2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Ametek U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Miljoco Corporation. f. WATTS. g. Weiss Instruments, Inc. h. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. i. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled Open-front, pressure relief type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-

1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

(kPa). 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. Nexus Valve, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. WATTS.



6. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) or NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. Nexus Valve, Inc. 4. WATTS. 5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F (minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-) diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.8 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS


1. ARCHON Industries, Inc. 2. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.



3. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division. 4. Pentair Valves & Controls; Penberthy Brand.

B. Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow.

C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and ball, flapper, or paddle wheel indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.

D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1034 kPa).

E. Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F (93 deg C).

F. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.



3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Metal case, industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be the following:


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following:


D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be the following:




E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C).

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F (0 to 150 deg C).

C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C).

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled Open-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed, direct-mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:


C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:


3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa).

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa).



BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523.12 - 1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61and NSF 372.



1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.


1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If


C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves. 4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4 (DN 100).

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Crane; a Crane brand.



d. Hammond Valve. e. Jomar Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.

B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Press Ends:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Hammond Valve. d. Jomar Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). g. Seats: PTFE or RPTFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. k. O-Ring Seal: Buna-N or EPDM.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends:




a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane; a Crane brand. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze or brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.

B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane; a Crane brand. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). g. Seats: PTFE or RTPFE. h. Stem: Bronze or brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. k. O-Ring Seal: EPDM or Buna-N.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION









A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.4 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG (1035 kPa) OR LESS)

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. 3. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim.



3.5 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Brass ball valve, one piece. Provide with solder-joint ends. 2. Bronze ball valve, one piece with bronze trim. Provide with solder-joint ends. 3. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. Provide with solder or press

connection-joint ends. 4. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with solder

or press connection-joint ends.



CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523.14 - 1

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze swing check valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves, press ends. 3. Iron swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.



1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set check valves in either closed or open position.






C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

D. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

E. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

F. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Hammond Valve. d. NIBCO INC. e. Powell Valves. f. WATTS.



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: PTFE.

C. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B584, bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). g. Disc: Brass or bronze.



2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. Powell Valves. f. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats, Class 125:


a. Crane; a Crane brand. b. Stockham; a Crane brand.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles. f. Trim: Composition. g. Seat Ring: Bronze. h. Disc Holder: Bronze. i. Disc: PTFE. j. Gasket: Asbestos free.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION











E. Check Valves: Install check valves for proper direction of flow.

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:



1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with

lever and weight or spring; or iron, center-guided, [metal-seat] [or] [resilient-seat] check valves.

c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged.



1. Vertical, Upflow Applications Only: Bronze lift check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections.

2. Horizontal and Vertical Applications: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with nonmetallic-to-metal seats, Class 125, with threaded or flanged end connections.



1. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered end connections. 2. Bronze swing check valves with press-end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with nonmetallic-to-metal seats, Class 125, with flanged end connections.


GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523.15 - 1

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves. 2. Iron gate valves. 3. Chainwheels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

C. RS: Rising stem.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.



1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.






C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSP 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, RS, Class 125:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Crane; a Crane brand. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. WATTS.



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:


a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane; a Crane brand. c. Hammond Valve. d. Jenkins Valves; a Crane brand. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 CHAINWHEELS


1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, chain guides, chain, and attachment brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to hand wheels.



1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron Bronze, of type and size required for valve. Include zinc or epoxy coating.

2. Chain: Brass, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION











E. Install chainwheels on operators for gate valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.




A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.


A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze gate valves, RS, Class 125 with soldered ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron gate valves, OS&Y, Class 125 with flanged ends.



1. Bronze gate valves, RS, Class 125 with soldered ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron gate valves, OS&Y, Class 125 with flanged ends.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe-positioning systems. 7. Equipment supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

3. Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.


A. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Equipment supports.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.






A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.



3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

C. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.


A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.




a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Flex-Strut Inc. c. G-Strut. d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: No coating. 9. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane. 10. Plastic Coating: PVC.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,:

a. Anvil International. b. FNW; Ferguson Enterprises, Inc. c. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.



4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: No coating 9. Paint Coating: Green epoxy, acrylic, or urethane. 10. Plastic Coating: PVC.

2.5 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS


1. Buckaroos, Inc. 2. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 3. Pipe Shields Inc. 4. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.



B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel. 3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.7 PIPE-POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system composed of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.

2.9 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus [200 lb (90 kg)] <Insert value>.


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-58. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

D. MetalFraming System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.



I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch

(2.67 mm) thick.



5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.


C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so


3.5 ADJUSTING


B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.



1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes.


E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C) pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).



7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical adjustment is unnecessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and vertical adjustment is unnecessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to expansion and contraction, is required.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.



2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0548.13 - 1

SECTION 220548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers.


1. Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment" for devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems.

2. Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC" for devices for HVAC equipment and systems.




2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.



D. Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and damping test data performed by an independent agency.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS



a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. Isolation Technology, Inc. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Korfund. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. f. Vibration Management Corp. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.



a. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.




a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. Isolation Technology, Inc. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Korfund. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. f. Vibration Isolation. g. Vibration Management Corp. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.


2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: .



2. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.



b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.4 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: .



2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.5 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: .




3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.



5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

6. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

b. Top housing with elastomeric pad.

2.6 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: .



2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

b. Top plate with elastomeric pad. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.7 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS



a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.



b. Isolation Technology, Inc. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Korfund. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. f. Vibration Isolation. g. Vibration Management Corp. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.




2.8 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig (3.45 MPa)on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.

2.9 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene.







a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc. d. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. e. Vibration Isolation. f. Vibration Management Corp. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


2.11 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression: .


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc. d. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. e. Vibration Isolation. f. Vibration Management Corp. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




a. Brimar Industries, Inc. b. Carlton Industries, LP.



c. Craftmark Pipe Markers. d. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. e. LEM Products Inc. f. Marking Services, Inc. g. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. emedco. 5. Marking Sevices Inc. 6. National Marker Company.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: Yellow.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).



F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.


J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. emedco. 6. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.




2.4 VALVE TAGS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 6. emedco. 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. Marking Sevices Inc.

B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or S-hook.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.


2.5 WARNING TAGS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. emedco. 5. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 6. Marking Sevices Inc.

B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm). 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.







A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.



D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air Piping:

a. Background: Safety blue. b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White.

3. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety purple. b. Letter Color: White.


A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: White.




A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 22 0716 - 1

SECTION 220716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment that is not factory insulated: 1. Domestic water, hot-water cold-water pumps.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


1. Product Data: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials.

3.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections. 2. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 3. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 4. Detail field application for each equipment type.

D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Equipment Mockups:

a. One tank or vessel. b. One pump.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.




A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Domestic Water Boiler Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Indoor Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Calcium Silicate: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C533, Type I or Type II.




a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Block Insulation: Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: Type III. 4. Board Insulation: Type IV. 5. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 6. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA.

I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II, and ASTM C1290, Type I Type II, with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C1393.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation.



d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

2. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket. 3. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. 4. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x

deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

K. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M or ASTM C1427, Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.


a. Armacell LLC.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.



2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.




a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. K-Flex USA.

2. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) 4. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F (4 to plus 93 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Consumer Solutions. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.



b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements, with supplier

listing on DOD QPD - Qualified Products Database. 5. Color: White.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 104 deg C). 4. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm (0.66 metric perms) at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Color: White.



2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.


2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Joint Sealants:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 101 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White or gray.

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: Aluminum.

D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 4 oz./sq. yd. (114 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. in. (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for covering equipment.



B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for equipment.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).




a. Alpha Associates, Inc.

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.


a. Polyguard Products, Inc.

2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.


a. 3M. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.



5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.


a. 3M. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:



1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) CL WARD & Family Inc. 3) Gemco. 4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

3. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.


1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank; length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Use product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.



2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel Stainless steel, fully annealed; 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

5. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, stainless steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

6. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

2.13 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30-mils (0.8-mm-) thick, minimum 1- by 1-inch (25- by 25-mm) PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C, white or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Stainless Steel Corner Angles: 0.024-inch (0.61-mm-) thick, minimum 1- by 1-inch (25- by 25-mm) stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of equipment, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.



D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.



N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.

O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides

of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm) from

insulation end joints and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions. d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks

and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins, and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft



cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm). 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a field-adjustable latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from stainless steel, at least 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. For below-ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal

between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Domestic Water Boiler Breechings:

1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals, and tighten bands without deforming insulation material.

2. Install two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.

3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)

wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

2. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Equipment Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Indoor Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 DOMESTIC WATER BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Round, exposed breeching and connector insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Calcium Silicate: 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

B. Round, concealed breeching and connector insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Calcium Silicate: 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 2. High-Temperature Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 3 inches (75 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-

kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. High-Temperature Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches (75 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-

kg/cu. m) nominal density.



C. Rectangular, exposed breeching and connector insulation shall be one of the following:


D. Rectangular, concealed breeching and connector insulation shall be one of the following:


3.11 INDOOR EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

B. Domestic water pump insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal

density. 3. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal

density.

C. Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 3. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal

density. 4. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal

density. 5. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 6. Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Equipment, Concealed: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.

D. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces of up to 72 Inches (1800 mm): 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.

E. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):



1. None.



PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions. 5. Roof drains and rainwater leaders. 6. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


1. Section 220716 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation" for equipment insulation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


1. Product Data: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, mastics, and sealants, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.



7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

D. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 2. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 3. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.



B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups:

a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe. b. One each of a 90 degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow. c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting. d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger valve.



e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert. f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of

insulation. g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer. h. One pressure temperature tap. i. One mechanical coupling. j. One union.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract


6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.

D. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.



B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.


F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ jacket. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ. 3. 850 deg F (454 deg C). 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.




A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.



B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.



C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.



2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.





E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Consumer Solutions. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements, with supplier

listing on DOD QPD - Qualified Products Database. 5. Color: White.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.





2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 104 deg C). 4. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm (0.66 metric perms) at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.



A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.


2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Joint Sealants:




a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 deg F (Minus 50 to plus 80 deg C). 4. Color: White or gray.

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: Aluminum.

D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.


A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.



2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering pipe and pipe fittings.



B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for pipe.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).


a. Alpha Associates, Inc.


A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.


C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.



a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.


a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.


a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.



2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 orType 316; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] wide with wing seal orclosed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.


a. C & F Wire.

2.13 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:


a. Buckaroos, Inc. b. Just Manufacturing. c. McGuire Manufacturing. d. MVG Molded Products. e. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. f. Truebro. g. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures,:




a. Truebro. b. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.



B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.


4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.



5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.



D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the



thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.



4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION


1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.



4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.


1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)

wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation


C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.



3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.



C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:



1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] <Insert dimension> thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) <Insert

dimension> thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:


2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:


C. Stormwater and Overflow:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:


D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:



E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.



F. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet (3 m) of Drain Receiving Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):




A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.


C. Piping, Concealed: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.

D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.



FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 1113 - 1

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for combined water service and fire-service mains.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.



B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms.


A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

B. Field quality-control test reports.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with ASTM F645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

1. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372..


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.



C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Application" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.


A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.



1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.

1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:


1) Anvil International. 2) Smith-Cooper International. 3) Victaulic Company.

b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Rigid Expansion Joints:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:




a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Hays Fluid Controls. c. Star Pipe Products. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.


C. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc. 2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and 1 or 2 flexing

sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.



A. Refer to Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for commonly used joining materials.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

D. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:




a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. Hays Fluid Controls. e. JCM Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.

a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Carbon steel Ductile iron. c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:


a. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing

pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners.

a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Carbon steel. c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. d. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. e. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

D. Flexible Connectors:

1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.

2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose.

E. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:



a. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:

a. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 2) Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F1545. 3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.6 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT

A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping:

1. Standards: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105. 2. Form: Sheet or tube. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness. 4. Color: Black.

2.7 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:




a. American AVK Co. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company. c. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc. d. Crane; a Crane brand. e. Flomatic Corporation. f. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. g. M & H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. h. McWane, Inc. i. Mueller Co. j. NIBCO INC. k. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc. l. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

3. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: AWWA C509.



2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company. b. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc. c. Crane; a Crane brand. d. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. M & H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. f. McWane, Inc. g. Mueller Co. h. NIBCO INC. i. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

C. Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Crane; a Crane brand. b. Hammond Valve. c. Jenkins Valves; a Crane brand. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).



3) End Connections: Threaded.

3. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron handwheel.

1) Standard: MSS SP-80.

2.8 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company. b. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc. c. Flowserve Corporation. d. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. M & H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. f. McWane, Inc. g. Mueller Co. h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

2.9 CHECK VALVES

A. AWWA Check Valves:




a. American AVK Co. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company. c. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. d. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc. e. Crane; a Crane brand. f. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. g. M & H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. h. McWane, Inc. i. Mueller Co. j. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping.

a. Standard: AWWA C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).

B. UL/FMG, Check Valves:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company. b. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc. c. Crane; a Crane brand. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. f. Matco-Norca. g. McWane, Inc. h. Mueller Co. i. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating; rubber-face checks, unless otherwise indicated; and ends matching piping.

a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).

2.10 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves:


a. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan. b. Homestead Valve. c. M & H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.



d. McWane, Inc. e. Milliken Valve Company. f. Pratt, Henry Company. g. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description: Resilient-seated eccentric.

a. Standard: MSS SP-108. b. Body: Cast iron. c. Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1207-kPa) minimum CWP. d. Seat Material: Suitable for potable-water service.

2.11 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES

A. Freeze-Protection Enclosures:


a. AquaSHIELD. b. BF Products Inc. c. DekoRRa Products LLC. d. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. e. G&C Enclosures. f. Hot Box: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F (minus 36 deg C).

a. Standard: ASSE 1060. b. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum

breakers.

1) Housing: Reinforced-aluminum or -fiberglass construction.

a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit.

b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Insulation inside housing. e) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

2) Electric heating cable or heater with self-limiting temperature control.

B. Enclosure Bases:

1. Description: 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum thickness precast concrete, of dimensions required to extend at least 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edges of enclosure housings. Include openings for piping.



2.12 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.

B. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) working pressure; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single-pole, double-throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed.

C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position.

D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) shall be any of the following: 1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and

mechanical joints.

F. Abovegroundwater-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) shall be any of the following: 1. Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron, grooved-end appurtenances; and grooved

joints.

G. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 100 to DN 300) shall be any of the following:



1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

H. Aboveground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 100 to DN 300) shall be ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

I. Underground Combined Water-Service and Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300) shall be any of the following:

1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

J. Aboveground Combined Water Service and Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300) shall be ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground:

a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, rising stem. b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem,

metal seated AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem, resilient seated UL/FMG, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem.

c. Check Valves: AWWA C508 UL/FMG, swing type.

3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping-system common requirements.


A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.



B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.

D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation. 1. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

F. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm), with top at least 12 inches (300 mm) below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (910 mm) cover over top. 2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) additional cover.

G. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

H. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

I. Sleeves are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

J. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

K. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

L. See Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes," Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems," and Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for fire-suppression-water piping inside the building.

M. See Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.



3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe. 6. On piping, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

G. Support vertical runs of piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.


A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41. 2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end,

ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. a. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric

flanges. b. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.



3.8 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Heat-fused joints. 6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Bonded-Joint Fiberglass, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M45. 4. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

3.10 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete base level and with top approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above grade.

B. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment.

C. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.



3.11 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.

B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.

1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke.

2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.

C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows:

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.

D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.

E. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.

F. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are specified in Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems" and Section 284621.13 "Conventional Fire-Alarm Systems."

3.12 CONNECTIONS

A. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for piping connections to valves and equipment.

B. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.



1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities" for identifying devices.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Piping joining materials. 3. Transition fittings. 4. Dielectric fittings.


1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping[ and water meters] outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.





A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.





A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.


A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper, Brass, or Bronze Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:


a. NIBCO INC. b. Viega LLC.



2. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. Sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with stainless steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal.

3. Minimum 200-psig (1379-kPa) working-pressure rating at 250 deg F (121 deg C).

H. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:


a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.

2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.


A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.

D. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.



E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc. c. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. d. Smith-Blair, Inc. e. Viking Johnson.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. HART Industrial Unions, LLC. b. Jomar Valve. c. Matco-Norca. d. WATTS. e. Wilkins. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:




a. Matco-Norca. b. WATTS. c. Wilkins. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube andductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.



M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."



E. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools and procedure recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.

F. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Square cut Rollgroove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

I. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.



2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for copper ductile iron piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting.

D. Support vertical runs of copper piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.





1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:



1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.



b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) and larger, shall be one of the following: 1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, mechanical-joint fittings; and

mechanical joints. 2. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed

joints. 3. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved

joints.

D. Under-building-slab, combined domestic water, building-service, and fire-service-main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300), shall be one of the following:

1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

2. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.

3. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B);copper, solder-joint

fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal-

joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B);copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.



G. Aboveground, combined domestic water-service and fire-service-main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to (DN 300), shall be one of the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Outlet boxes. 7. Hose stations. 8. Hose bibbs. 9. Wall hydrants. 10. Ground hydrants. 11. Post hydrants. 12. Drain valves. 13. Water-hammer arresters. 14. Air vents. 15. Trap-seal primer valves. 16. Trap-seal primer systems. 17. Flexible connectors. 18. Water meters.


1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 3. Section 224500 "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment. 4. Section 224713 "Drinking Fountains" for water filters for water coolers.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.




C. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For water consumption.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14.

B. Comply with NSF 372 for low lead.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 (860) psig (kPa) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.



4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1035. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10) matching faucet size. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)]. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. End Connections: [Union, solder] [Solder] joint. 7. Finish: [Chrome plated] [Rough bronze].

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: [12 (83)] <Insert value> psig (kPa) maximum, through middle third of

flow range. 5. Size: <Insert value> NPS (DN). 6. Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 7. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 8. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> psig (kPa) for sizes NPS 2 (DN 50)

and smaller; <Insert value> psig (kPa) for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [cast iron with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved] [steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved] [stainless steel] for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

10. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [flanged] <Insert type> for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

11. Configuration: Designed for [horizontal, straight-through] [vertical-inlet, horizontal-center-section, and vertical-outlet] [vertical] <Insert configuration> flow.

12. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.



b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: [5 (35)] <Insert value> psig (kPa) maximum, through middle third of

flow range. 5. Size: <Insert value> NPS (DN). 6. Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 7. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 8. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> psig (kPa) for sizes NPS 2 (DN 50)

and smaller; <Insert value> psig (kPa) for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [cast iron with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved] [steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved] [stainless steel] for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

10. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [flanged] <Insert type> for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

11. Configuration: Designed for [horizontal, straight-through] <Insert configuration> flow.

12. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

D. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1022. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10). 5. Body: Stainless steel. 6. End Connections: Threaded.

E. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1024. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] [NPS 1 (DN 25)] [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)]. 5. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

F. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers <Insert drawing designation if any>:



1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1052. 3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure. 4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20). 5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.

G. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-

procedure instructions.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Type: [Ball] [or] [Y-pattern globe] valve with two readout ports and memory-setting

indicator. 3. Body: [Brass] [or] [bronze]. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

C. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.



6. Connections: Threaded[ union] inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: <Insert value> deg F (deg C). 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 10. Valve Finish: [Chrome plated] [Rough bronze].

B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Type: [Exposed-mounted] [Cabinet-type], thermostatically controlled, water mixing

valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded[ union] inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: <Insert value> deg F (deg C). 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> gpm (L/s). 10. Selected Valve Flow Rate at 45-psig (310-kPa) Pressure Drop: <Insert value> gpm

(L/s). 11. Pressure Drop at Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> psig (kPa). 12. Valve Finish: [Chrome plated] [Polished, chrome plated] [Rough bronze]. 13. Piping Finish: [Chrome plated] [Copper]. 14. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for [recessed] [surface] mounting and with

hinged, stainless-steel door.

C. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: <Insert value> deg F (deg C). 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: <Insert value> gpm (L/s).

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron[ with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and] for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.



3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: [0.020 (0.51)] [0.033 (0.84)] [0.062 (1.57)] <Insert dimension> inch (mm).

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): [0.045 (1.14)] [0.062 (1.57)] [0.125 (3.18)] <Insert dimension> inch (mm).

c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: [0.10 (2.54)] [0.125 (3.18)] [0.25 (6.35)] <Insert dimension> inch (mm).

6. Drain: [Pipe plug] [Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve].

2.8 OUTLET BOXES

A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: [Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel] [Enameled-steel, epoxy-

painted-steel, or plastic] [Plastic] [Stainless-steel] box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing.

6. Drain: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] [NPS 2 (DN 50)] standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

7. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female, garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers.

8. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked end.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: [Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel] [Enameled-steel, epoxy-

painted-steel, or plastic] [Plastic] [Stainless-steel] box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or

smaller copper tube outlet. 5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15)

copper, water tubing.

2.9 HOSE STATIONS

A. Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations <Insert drawing designation if any>:



1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose connection, and hose

rack. Include thermometer in front. 4. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel. 5. Body Material: Bronze[ with stainless-steel wetted parts]. 6. Body Finish: Rough bronze[, chrome plated]. 7. Mounting: [Wall, with reinforcement] [Floor, with stainless-steel pedestal]. 8. Supply Fittings: [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] gate, globe, or ball valve and

check valve and [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] [NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.

9. Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; [25 (7.6)] [50 (15)] <Insert dimension> feet (m) long.

10. Nozzle: With hand-squeeze, on-off control. 11. Vacuum Breaker:

a. Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer complying with ASSE 1052.

b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

2.10 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 3. Body Material: Bronze. 4. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 5. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint

inlet. 6. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 7. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 8. Vacuum Breaker: Integral[ or field-installation,] nonremovable, drainable, hose-

connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Service Areas: [Rough bronze] [Chrome or nickel plated]. 11. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 12. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 13. Operation for Service Areas: [Wheel handle] [Operating key]. 14. Operation for Finished Rooms: [Wheel handle] [Operating key]. 15. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 16. Include[ integral] wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.11 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>:



1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for [concealed] [exposed]-outlet, self-draining wall

hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25). 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: [Polished nickel bronze] [Chrome plated] <Insert finish>. 10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: [Polished nickel bronze] [Rough bronze] <Insert

finish>. 12. Operating Keys(s): [One] [Two] with each wall hydrant.

2.12 GROUND HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Ground Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M. 3. Type: Nonfreeze, concealed-outlet ground hydrant with box. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve below frost line. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 7. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8. Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off. 9. Box: [Standard] [Deep] pattern with cover. 10. Box and Cover Finish: [Rough] [Polished nickel] <Insert finish> bronze. 11. Operating Key(s): [One] [Two] with each ground hydrant. 12. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1011.

2.13 POST HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze, Draining-Type Post Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M. 3. Type: Nonfreeze, exposed-outlet post hydrant. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve below frost line. 6. Casing: Bronze with casing guard. 7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 8. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 9. Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off.



10. Vacuum Breaker:

a. Nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer complying with ASSE 1052.

b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

11. Operating Key(s): [One] [Two] with each loose-key-operation wall hydrant.

B. Freeze-Resistant Sanitary Yard Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1057, Type 5 for nondraining hydrants. 3. Operation: Wheel handle. 4. Head: Copper alloy, with pail hook. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4-inch (DN 20) threaded inlet and inlet nozzle, galvanized-steel riser, and

venturi. 6. Canister: [Plastic] [Zinc-plated steel] with atmospheric-vent device. 7. Vacuum Breaker:

a. Removable hose-connection backflow preventer complying with ASSE 1052. b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet for field installation.

2.14 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: ASTM B62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.



2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap.

2.15 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: [Metal bellows] [Copper tube with piston]. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.16 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device <Insert drawing designation if any>:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup

connection. 3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum. 4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.17 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum [200 psig (1380 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)]. 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Backflow Preventers: Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe



diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Water Regulators: Install with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

C. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

D. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

E. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each pump.

F. Outlet Boxes: Install boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

G. Hose Stations: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

H. Ground Hydrants: Install with 1 (0.75) cu. yd. (cu. m) of crushed gravel around drain hole. Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.

I. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

J. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Comply with requirements for grounding equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies. 5. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers. 6. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 7. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection, backflow-preventer assemblies. 8. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers. 9. Water pressure-reducing valves. 10. Calibrated balancing valves. 11. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 12. Manifold, thermostatic, water mixing-valve assemblies. 13. Primary water tempering valves. 14. Outlet boxes. 15. Hose stations. 16. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check, backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.


DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 22 1123.13 - 1

SECTION 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Multiplex, variable-speed booster pumps.


1. Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps" for domestic-water circulation pumps. 2. Section 221223 "Facility Indoor Potable-Water Storage Tanks" for separate

hydropneumatic domestic-water tanks for multiplex booster pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PID: Proportional Integral Derivative.

B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles.


B. Shop Drawings: For booster pumps.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For booster pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective covers during storage.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 MULTIPLEX, VARIABLE-SPEED BOOSTER PUMPS


1. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. 2. Patterson Pump Company; a Gorman-Rupp company. 3. SyncroFlo, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, fluid-handling system for domestic water, with pumps, piping, valves, specialties, and controls, and mounted on base.

C. Pumps:

1. Type: End suction as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for end-suction, close-coupled, single-stage, overhung-impeller, centrifugal pump.

2. Casing: Radially split; stainless steel. 3. Impeller: Closed, stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced and keyed to shaft. 4. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve and deflector. 5. Seal: Mechanical. 6. Orientation: Mounted horizontally.



D. Motors: Single speed, with pre-greased, permanently shielded, ball-bearings. Select motors that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve.

E. Piping: Stainless-steel pipe and fittings.

F. Valves:

1. Shutoff Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: two-piece, full-port ball valve, in each pump's suction and discharge piping.

2. Shutoff Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Gate valve, in each pump's suction and discharge piping and in inlet and outlet headers.

3. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Silent or swing type in each pump's discharge piping.

4. Check Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Silent type in each pump's discharge piping.

5. Thermal-Relief Valve: Temperature-and-pressure relief type in pump's discharge header piping.

G. Dielectric Fittings: With insulating material to isolate joined dissimilar metals.

H. VFC: Comply with Section 262923 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers."

I. Base: Structural steel.

J. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 (1035) psig (kPa). 2. Booster-Pump Capacity: 110 gpm (L/s). 3. Minimum Inlet Pressure: 30 psig (kPa). 4. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 35 psig (kPa). 5. Discharge Pressure: 60 psig (kPa). 6. Header Size: 3 NPS (DN).

7. Each of Two Lag Pumps:

a. Capacity: 65 gpm (L/s). b. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Motor Horsepower: 3 hp. 2) Volts: 208 V. 3) Phases: Three. 4) Hertz: 60 Hz.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.



1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in NFPA 70.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.

C. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:

1. UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment." 2. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels." 3. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps." 4. UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."

D. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for booster pumps to verify actual locations of piping connections before booster-pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Booster-Pump Mounting:

1. Install booster pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Support connected domestic-water piping so weight of piping is not supported by booster pumps.



3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Booster-Pump Piping Connections: Connect domestic-water piping to booster pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of system suction and discharge headers piping.

1. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for general-duty valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install union, flanged, or grooved-joint connections on suction and discharge headers piping at connection to domestic-water piping. Comply with requirements for unions and flanges specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

3. Install valved bypass, same size as and between piping, at connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

4. Install flexible connectors, same size as piping, on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

5. Where installing piping adjacent to booster pumps, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."



3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and

retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster pumps to

confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

E. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 STARTUP SERVICE



3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust booster pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust pressure set points.



C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting booster pump to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain booster pumps.



INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS 22 1123.21 - 1

SECTION 221123.21 - INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.


1. Section 221123.13 "Domestic-Water Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems. 2. Section 331113 "Potable Water Supply Wells" for well pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


1. Product Data: For pump controls.


A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment. Show support locations, type of support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which pumps will be attached. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for inline, domestic-water pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.








A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.



C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 17 gpm.. 2. Inlet and Outlet Size: 1-1/4 NPS. 3. Pump Speed: 3300 rpm. 4. Pump Control: Thermostat Timer. 5. Motor Horsepower: 270 Watts 6. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 120 V. b. Phase: Single phase. c. Hertz: 60 Hz. d. Full-Load Amperes: 2.3 A.

D. Pump Construction:

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa). 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F (104 deg C). 4. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded or companion-flange connections. 5. Impeller: composite or stainless steel. 6. Motor: Three speed. 7. Aquastat.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."


2.4 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Range: 50 to 125 deg F (10 to 52 deg C). 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250,. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Power Requirement: 120 V ac. 7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F (41 deg C) and stop pump at 120 deg F (49 deg C).

B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.



1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting. 3. Operation of Pump: On or off. 4. Transformer: Provide if required. 5. Power Requirement: 120 V ac. 6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for seven days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Pump Mounting:

1. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with cast-iron base mounted on concrete base using vibration isolation type and deflection as specified in Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.



F. Install timers on wall in engineer's office.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. c. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping." 4. Install pressure gauge at suction of each pump and pressure gauge at discharge of each

pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."



B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.

C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.






E. Tests and Inspections:




F. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats, timers, for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.



6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 1316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 2. Copper tube and fittings. 3. Specialty pipe fittings.


1. Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside the building.

2. Section 221329 "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps" for effluent and sewage pumps. 3. Section 226600 "Chemical-Waste Systems for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for

chemical-waste and vent piping systems.







A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.





A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS


1. AB & I Foundry; a part of the McWane family of companies. 2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 3. Tyler Pipe; a part of McWane family of companies.

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).



C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

D. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.


A. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type B and Type C), water tube, drawn temper.

C. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:


1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Froet Industries LLC. 4) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries. 5) Plastic Oddities.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.



e. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:


1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

4. Pressure Transition Couplings:


1) Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. 2) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 3) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 4) JCM Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: AWWA C219. c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to,

and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Carbon steel. e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric Unions:


1) A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. 2) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 3) Central Plastics Company. 4) HART Industrial Unions, LLC. 5) Jomar Valve. 6) WATTS. 7) Wilkins.



8) Zurn Industries, LLC. b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2. Dielectric Flanges:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 2) WATTS. 3) Wilkins. 4) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2) Calpico, Inc. 3) Central Plastics Company. 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

4. Dielectric Nipples:


1) Elster Perfection Corporation. 2) Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company. 3) Josam Company. 4) Victaulic Company.



b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 2) Electroplated steel nipple. 3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.



1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

N. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

O. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

Q. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

R. Plumbing Specialties:



1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves

as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.



c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

F. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges

nipples. 4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valve installation requirements.

B. Shutoff Valves:

1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge.




A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install hangers for cast-iron and copper soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

E. Support vertical runs of cast iron soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.



4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main. 2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:



1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa).

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection. d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

a. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. b. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.



4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 and DN 90): Hard copper tube, Type M (Type C); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints.


G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:



1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints.




SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashing assemblies. 2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for preformed flashings. 3. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for through-penetration firestop assemblies. 4. Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors" for metal and concrete interceptors outside

the building, grease interceptors, grease-removal devices, oil interceptors, and solids interceptors.

5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.

6. Section 224300 "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors. 7. Section 334200 "Stormwater Conveyance" for storm drainage piping and piping

specialties outside the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised-head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts FCO:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. WATTS.



e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk Spigot. 8. Closure: Cast-iron plug. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Rough bronze. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top-Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A74, Service Class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected

piping. 5. Closure Plug:

a. Cast iron. b. raised head. c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw. d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access, Cover Plate: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless steel cover plate with screw.

7. Wall Access, Frame and Cover: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless steel wall-installation frame and cover.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service Class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.



B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller

and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches (51 mm) above floor.

E. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

F. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

G. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

H. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

I. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

J. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

K. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.




A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.

1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



SANITARY DRAINS 22 1319.13 - 1

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.



2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains FD-1:

1. <Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor Sanitary drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron Cast Iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Anchor Flange: Required. 7. Clamping Device: Not required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Backwater Valve: Not required. 10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required. 11. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 14. Top Shape: Round. 15. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 16. Funnel: Not required. 17. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection. 18. Trap Material: Cast iron. 19. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap. 20. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. 3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.



c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install open drain fittings with top of hub [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] <Insert dimension> above floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors" for grease interceptors, grease-removal devices, oil interceptors, sand interceptors, and solid interceptors.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION




SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS 22 1323 - 1

SECTION 221323 - SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grease interceptors. 2. Solids interceptors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

B. PP: Polypropylene.


A. Product Data: For each type of metal interceptor. Include materials of fabrication, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, operating characteristics, size and location of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and size of precast-concrete interceptor indicated.

1. Include materials of construction, dimensions, rated capacities, retention capacities, location and size of each pipe connection, furnished specialties, and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Interceptors, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Piping connections. Include size, location, and elevation of each. 2. Interface with underground structures and utility services.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste interceptors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Interruption of Existing Sewer Services: Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sewer services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sewer services without Construction Manager's Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GREASE INTERCEPTORS

A. Cast-Iron or Steel Grease Interceptors GT-1:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc. e. WATTS. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: PDI G101 and ASME A112.14.3, for intercepting and retaining FOG from food wastewater.

3. PDI Seal: Required. 4. Body Material: Cast iron or steel. 5. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel. 6. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel. 7. Body Extension: Not required. 8. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Number of Compartments: One. b. Flow Rate: 4 gpm.. c. Retention Capacity: 7 lbs. d. Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size: 1-1/2 NPS.

e. End Connections: Threaded. f. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet. g. Trapped Outlet Required: Yes.



h. Vent Pipe Size: 1-1/2 NPS. i. Mounting: Above floor Inside cabinet, under sink. j. Flow-Control Fitting: Not required. k. Operation: Manual cleaning.

2.2 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS

A. Cast-Iron or Steel Solids Interceptors:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc. e. WATTS. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor made for removing and retaining sediment from wastewater.

3. Body Material: Cast iron or steel. 4. Interior Separation Device: Baffles Screens. 5. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel. 6. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel. 7. Flow Rate: Not required. 8. Inlet and Outlet Size: 1-1/2 NPS. 9. End Connections: Threaded. 10. Mounting: Above floor Inline.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Set interceptors level and plumb.

B. Set metal interceptors level and plumb.

C. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor unless otherwise indicated.



2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet.

D. Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that do not have integral cleanout on outlet.

1. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral trap and are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Make piping connections between interceptors and piping systems.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification materials and installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground interceptors.

2. Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 3. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Grease interceptors. 2. Solids interceptors.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect sanitary waste interceptors from damage during construction period.

B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by sanitary waste interceptor installation.



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1423 - 1

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal roof drains. 2. Cleanouts.


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for penetrations of roofs. 2. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping roof penetrations.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains RD-1:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. WATTS. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.



2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-to 16-inch (357- to 406-mm) diameter. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Outlet Type: Inside caulk. 9. Extension Collars: Required. 10. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 11. Expansion Joint: Not required. 12. Dome Material: Cast iron. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Required. 15. Water Dam: 2 inches (50 mm) high.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts FCO:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Outlet Connection: Hub with inside caulk Hub with gasket. 8. Closure: Cast-iron plug.



9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Rough bronze. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected

piping. 5. Closure Plug:

a. Cast iron. b. raisedhead. c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw. d. Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.

D. Test Tees:



2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A74, ASTM A888, or CISPI 301. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or no-hub, cast-iron soil-

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure Plug: raised head, brass. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and

smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical storm piping conductor.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

F. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

G. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies for penetrations of fire- and smoke-rated assemblies.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.



B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

3.4 PROTECTION





SUMP PUMPS 22 1429 - 1

SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Submersible sump pumps. 2. Sump-pump basins and basin covers.


1. Section 221329 "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps" for effluent and sewage pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

2.2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

A. Submersible, Fixed-Position, Double-Seal Sump Pumps ESP-1:


a. BJM Pumps, LLC. b. EBARA Fluid Handling. c. FEMEYERS. d. Flygt; a brand of Xylem Inc. e. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, USA. f. PENTAIR.

2. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested sump-pump unit. 3. Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller,

centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3. 4. Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into

impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection. 5. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A48/A48M, Class No. 25 A cast

iron ASTM A532/A532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron and ASTM B584, cast bronze, design for clear wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft.

6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings.

7. Seals: Mechanical. 8. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm. 9. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; lifting

eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

a. Motor Housing Fluid: Oil.



10. Controls:

a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 4X. b. Switch Type: Pedestal-mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons. c. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps

if one cannot handle load. d. Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater

than 60 inches (1500 mm). e. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;

120 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

11. Controls:

a. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 4X; wall mounted. b. Switch Type: Mechanical-float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures with

mounting rod and electric cables. c. Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps

if one cannot handle load. d. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mechanical-

float, mercury-float, or pressure switch matching control and electric bell; 120 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

12. Control-Interface Features:

a. Remote Alarm Contacts: For remote alarm interface. b. Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump controls for

interface to building automation system and capable of providing the following:

1) On-off status of pump. 2) Alarm status.

2.3 SUMP-PUMP CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Unit Capacity: 50 gpm (L/min.).

B. Number of Pumps: One.

C. Each Pump:

1. Capacity: 50 gpm (L/min.). 2. Total Dynamic Head: 17 feet (kPa). 3. Speed: 3450. 4. Discharge Size: 2 NPS (DN). 5. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Motor Horsepower: 0.5 hp. b. Volts: 120 V ac. c. Phases: Single. d. Hertz: 60.



2.4 SUMP-PUMP BASINS AND BASIN COVERS

A. Basins: Factory-fabricated, watertight, cylindrical, basin sump with top flange and sidewall openings for pipe connections.

1. Material: Cast iron Fiberglass. 2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and accessories. 3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or attached to

sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.

B. Basin Covers: Fabricate metal cover with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.

1. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Inlet No. 1:

a. Drainage Pipe Size: 2 NPS (DN). b. Type: Flanged outside.

2. Cover Material: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating. 3. Cover Diameter: <Insert value> inches (mm), but not less than outside diameter of basin

top flange. 4. Manhole Required in Cover: No. 5. Vent Size: Not required.

2.5 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."


B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and filling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."



3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping connections before sump pump installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Pump Installation Standards: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, inspect, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



B. Adjust control set points.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.



FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 3400 - 1

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial, power-vent, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room drawing or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which the items described in this Section are shown and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired, domestic-water heater.

D. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



E. Source quality-control reports.


G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Two year(s).

b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASME Compliance:



1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

C. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Power-Vent, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:


a. A. O. Smith Corporation. b. Bradford White Corporation. c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 4. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig (1035-kPa) working-

pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless steel flanges and in accordance with ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

5. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except

connections and controls.



e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Burner: For use with power-vent, gas-fired, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas

fuel. g. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20/CSA C22.2 No. 60730-2-5, electric, automatic,

gas-ignition system. h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. i. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices

or systems. j. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

6. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction. 7. Power-Vent System: Exhaust fan, interlocked with burner.

B. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 60 gal. (L). 2. Recovery: 138 gph (L/s) at 100 deg F (56 deg C) temperature rise. 3. Temperature Setting: 125 deg F (52 deg C). 4. Fuel Gas Demand: <Insert cfh (L/s)>. 5. Fuel Gas Input: 120 Btu/h (W)>. 6. Gas Pressure Regulator:

a. Capacity: <Insert cfh (L/s)>. b. Inlet Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa) or inches (mm)> water column. c. Gas Pressure Required at Burner: <Insert psig (kPa) or inches (mm)> water

column.

7. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 120 V. b. Phase: . c. Hertz: 60 Hz. d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value> A. e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value> A. f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value> A.

8. Minimum Vent Diameter: 4 inches (mm).

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:




a. A. O. Smith Corporation. b. AMTROL, Inc. c. Honeywell. d. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

4. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

5. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). b. Capacity Acceptable: 4 gal. (15.1 L) minimum.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20) with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement in accordance with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and calibrated memory-stop balancing valves to provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater.

F. Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

1. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

H. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig (3.5-kPa) 2-psig (13.8-kPa) pressure rating as required to match gas supply.



I. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

J. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

K. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

L. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

M. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Provide dimension that will support bottom of domestic-water heater minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) above the floor.

N. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial domestic-water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.



2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.



7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters in accordance with NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves.

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend domestic-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."



H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

J. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

K. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

L. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25 percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for fuel-oil piping specified in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."

C. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."










2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


F. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. Training shall be a minimum of hour(s).



COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 22 4213.13 - 1

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets. 2. Flushometer valves and tanks. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.

B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) from other drain line connections or fixture and where less than 1.5 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.




C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets WC-2A: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.


a. American Standard. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Kohler Co. d. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. e. Sloan Valve Company. f. TOTO USA, INC. g. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Handicapped/elderly, complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40); top. i. Color: White.

3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A1045 or ASME A112.4.3. 4. Flushometer Valve: FV-2A. 5. Toilet Seat: TS-2.

2.2 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets WC-1A: Wall mounted, top spud, accessible.





2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Standard. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40); top.

3. Flushometer Valve: FV-1A. 4. Toilet Seat: TS-1A. 5. Support: Water closet carrier. 6. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Water Closets WC-1: Wall mounted, top spud.



2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Standard. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40); top.

3. Flushometer Valve: FV-1. 4. Toilet Seat: TS-1. 5. Support: Water closet carrier. 6. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard.



2.3 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Hard-Wired, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves FV-1A, FV-1, FV-2A:


a. American Standard. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1037. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel. 8. Style: Exposed. 9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in


10. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

11. Consumption: 1.28 gal. (4.8 L) per flush. 12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1 (DN 25). 13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32).

2.4 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats TS-1A, TS-1, TS-2A:


a. American Standard. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 4. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty). 5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front. 6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check. 7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal. 8. Seat Cover: Not required. 9. Color: White.



2.5 SUPPORTS

A. Water Closet Carrier:


a. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M. 3. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and

arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate. 3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal. 3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto

waste-fitting seals; and attach to support. 4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:



1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. 5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.




A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL URINALS 22 4213.16 - 1

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals. 2. Flushometer valves. 3. Supports.


1. Section 224600 "Security Plumbing Fixtures" for security urinals.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for urinals.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals U-1A, U-1: Wall hung, back outlet, washout, accessible. 1. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Washout with extended shields. d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap. e. Water Consumption: Water saving. f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4 (DN 20), top. g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2 (DN 50), back. h. Color: White.

2. Flushometer Valve: Insert urinal flushometer-valve designation from "Urinal Flushometer Valves" Article.

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling. b. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50).

4. Support: Type I Urinal Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular, steel uprights..

5. Urinal Mounting Height: Standard Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Hard-Wired, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves: 1. Standard: ASSE 1037. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 3. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. 4. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 5. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 6. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel. 7. Style: Exposed. 8. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.



9. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

10. Consumption: 0.125 gal. per flush. 11. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 12. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)].

2.3 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Urinal Carrier: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports. 3. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports. 4. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. 5. Install trap-seal liquid in waterless urinals.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals. 2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals. 3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping. 4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.



3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on open side of compartment.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match urinals.



D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.



A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 22 4216.13 - 1

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories. 2. Faucets. 3. Supply fittings. 4. Waste fittings. 5. Supports.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.




C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.



1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory L-1A, L-1: Oval, vitreous china, undercounter mounted.


a. American Standard. b. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. c. Kohler Co.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For undercounter mounting. c. Nominal Size: Oval, 19 by 16 inches (483 by 406 mm). d. Faucet-Hole Punching: No holes. e. Faucet-Hole Location: On countertop. f. Color: White. g. Mounting Material: Sealant and undercounter mounting kit.

3. Faucet: Insert lavatory faucet designation from "Solid-Brass, Manually Operated Faucets" or "Solid-Brass, Automatically Operated Lavatory Faucets" Article.

2.2 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory L-2A: Wheelchair, vitreous china, wall mounted.




a. American Standard. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. d. Kohler Co.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: Slab or wheelchair. c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 27 by 20 inches (686 by 508 mm). d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 2-inch (51-mm) centers. e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. g. Mounting: For concealed-arm carrier.

3. Faucet: Insert lavatory faucet designation from "Solid-Brass, Manually Operated Faucets" or "Solid-Brass, Automatically Operated Lavatory Faucets" Article.

4. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier. 5. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.3 SOLID-BRASS, AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets: Automatic-type, hard-wired, electronic-sensor-operated, nonmixing, solid-brass valve.


a. American Standard. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. d. Kohler Co. e. Sloan Valve Company. f. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

5. Body Type: Single hole. 6. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 7. Finish: Polished chrome plate.



8. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.). 9. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. 10. Spout: Rigid type. 11. Spout Outlet: Aerator. 12. Drain: Not part of faucet.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper-pipe and brass straight or offset tailpieces

ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4 (DN 40 by DN 32). 2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

(0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange. 3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-)

thick stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.6 SUPPORTS

A. Type II Lavatory Carrier:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.



B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 4216.16 - 1

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Service sinks. 2. Utility sinks. 3. Sink faucets. 4. Laminar-flow, faucet-spout outlets. 5. Supports. 6. Supply fittings. 7. Waste fittings.


1. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for residential sinks.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.





A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.




A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins MB-1: Terrazzo, floor mounted. 1. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99. b. Shape: Square. c. Nominal Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). d. Height: 12 inches (305 mm) 12 inches (305 mm) with dropped front. e. Tiling Flange: Not required. f. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces. g. Color: Not applicable. h. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 (DN 80) outlet.

2. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall. 3. Faucet: Insert sink-faucet designation from "Sink Faucets" Article.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets:


1) American Standard.



2) Bradley Corporation. 3) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. 4) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 5) Just Manufacturing.

2. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets:


1) American Standard. 2) Bradley Corporation. 3) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. 4) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 5) Just Manufacturing.

3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. 5. Body Type: Centerset Widespread. 6. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 7. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 8. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.). 9. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches (102 mm). 10. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed. 11. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace. 12. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. 13. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

C. Sink Faucets: Automatic, sensor-operated type, 120 V ac hard-wired, mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets:


1) American Standard. 2) Bradley Corporation. 3) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.

2. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets:


1) American Standard. 2) Bradley Corporation. 3) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.

3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.



4. General: Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

5. Body Type: Single hole. 6. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 7. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 8. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.9 L/min.). 9. Mounting Type: Deck. 10. Spout Type: Rigid spout. 11. Spout Outlet: Aerator. 12. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Below deck,, with check valves. 13. Control module: Below deck, water-resistant module with internal flow setting switches.

2.3 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AM Conservation Group, Inc. 2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. 3. NEOPERL, Inc. 4. T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

C. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.

2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Type II Sink Carrier:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Wade Drains. e. WATTS. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.




2.5 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.


C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.


F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel

flexible hose.

2.6 WASTE FITTINGS


B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40). 2. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-)


2.7 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.





3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4300 - 1

SECTION 224300 - HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following healthcare fixtures and specialties: 1. Flushometer valves. 2. Clinic sinks. 3. Supports.


1. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for residential fixtures for use in healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.

2. Section 224213.13 "Commercial Water Closets" for conventional water closets, flushometer valves, carriers, and seats for use healthcare facilities, but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes.

3. Section 224213.16 "Commercial Urinals" for urinals for use in healthcare facilities. 4. Section 224216.13 "Commercial Lavatories" for lavatories for use in healthcare facilities,

but not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes. 5. Section 224216.16 "Commercial Sinks" for sinks for use in healthcare facilities, but not

requiring special healthcare fixture attributes. 6. Section 224223 "Commercial Showers" for showers for use in healthcare facilities, but

not requiring special healthcare fixture attributes. 7. Section 224500 "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for emergency showers and eye-wash

units.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fixtures.








A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


a. Servicing and adjustments of flushometer valves.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves.


a. Delany Products. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1037. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Features: Integral check stop, backflow-prevention device, and outlet-tube-mounted

bedpan washer. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Style: Exposed. 8. Consumption: 6.5 gal. per flush. 9. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1 (DN 25). 10. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32), extended length.

2.2 CLINIC SINKS

A. Clinic Sinks CSS-1: Wall mounted.




a. American Standard. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Kohler Co. d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Fixture: Back-outlet, vitreous-china, blowout-type, flushing-rim, service sink.

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Nominal Size: 25 by 20 inches (635 by 510 mm). c. Outlet Size: NPS 4 (DN 100). d. Color: White. e. Rim Guard: Stainless steel, on front.

3. Flushometer Valve: Required. 4. Faucet: Required. 5. Support: Type IV sink carrier. 6. Sink Mounting Height: Standard.

2.3 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual-operation mixing valve.


a. American Standard. b. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company. c. Delta Faucet Company. d. Elkay Manufacturing Co. e. Just Manufacturing. f. Kohler Co. g. Moen Incorporated. h. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 3. Configuration: Hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and

fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. 4. Body Type: Centerset Widespread. 5. Body Material: Solid brass. 6. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.). 8. Control: Wrist-blade, 4-inch (102-mm) handle(s). 9. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed. 10. Spout Type: Rigid,. 11. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.



12. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow Hose thread.

2.4 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes faucet flow.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

2.5 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Sink Carrier: ASME A112.6.1M.


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Wade Drains. e. WATTS. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2.6 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.


C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.


F. Risers: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel, flexible hose.



2.7 WASTE FITTINGS


B. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 DN 40 tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40). 2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

(0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange. 3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-)


2.8 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install healthcare plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.



C. Install counter-mounted fixtures in and attached to casework.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water-distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valve if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts, if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

F. Install laminar-flow, faucet-spout fittings in faucet spouts where laminar-flow fittings are specified.

G. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

I. Seal joints between healthcare plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

J. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Comply with requirements for water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with requirements for soil and waste drainage piping and vent piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Comply with requirements for atmospheric vent piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

E. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning healthcare plumbing fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. After installing healthcare plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean healthcare plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of healthcare plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4500 - 1

SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Eyewash equipment. 2. Eye/face wash equipment. 3. Water-tempering equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.

C. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply.

D. Tepid: Moderately warm.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:








A. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality Control" Article.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ISEA Standard: Comply with ISEA Z358.1.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372, for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1,; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

2.2 EYEWASH EQUIPMENT

A. Sink, Swivel-Type, Plumbed Eyewash Unit, EEW-1:


a. Acorn Safety. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Haws Corporation.

2. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm (1.5 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes.



3. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.

4. Control-Valve Actuator: Movement of spray-head assembly to position over sink. 5. Spray-Head Assembly: Two spray heads with offset piping. 6. Mounting: Deck next to sink.

2.3 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT

A. Hot- and Cold-Water, Water-Tempering Equipment, ETMV-1:


a. Acorn Safety. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Haws Corporation.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated equipment with thermostatic mixing valve.

a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 85 deg F (29 deg C) tepid, potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F (3 deg C) throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosion-resistant enclosure.

b. Supply Connections: For hot and cold water.


A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.



C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures, to facilitate maintenance of the equipment. Use ball or gate valve if specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes emergency equipment.

2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Install shutoff valve and strainer in steam piping and shutoff valve in condensate return piping. Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping Specialties."

F. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

G. Install thermometers in supply and outlet piping connections to water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of emergency equipment receptors that are indicated to be directly connected to drainage system. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water, water-tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with requirements for hot- and cold-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

C. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance of fixtures.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for identification materials specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Emergency plumbing fixtures and water-tempering equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.

B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.



DRINKING FOUNTAINS 22 4713 - 1

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountain.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.



2.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains EWC-1: Stainless steel, recessed, wheelchair accessible.


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation.



d. Oasis International. 2. Standards:

a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372. b. Comply with ICC A117.1.

3. Receptor Shape: Concave with flush wall flange. 4. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck. 5. Maximum Water Flow: 0.5 gpm (0.0316 L/s). 6. Control: Push bar. 7. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap, complying with

ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. 8. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with shutoff valve. 9. Support: Mounting frame or brackets for attaching to substrate.

B. Bottle-Filling Station EWC-1: Surface-mounted,wheelchair accessible, vandal-resistant.


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Haws Corporation. c. Oasis International.

2. Standards:

a. Comply with ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4. b. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372. c. Comply with ICC A117.1.

3. Cabinet: Stainless steel/ABS combination. 4. Finish Color: Stainless Steel. 5. Bottle Filler: Sensor activation, with 20-second automatic shut-off timer. Fill rate 0.5 to

1.5 gpm (0.03155 to 0.09464 L/s). 6. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) tailpiece. 7. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with shutoff valve. 8. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) brass P-trap. 9. Support: Type I water cooler carrier. 10. Bottle-Filling Station Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc.



d. Wade Drains. e. WATTS. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install recessed drinking fountains secured to wood blocking in wall construction.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS





C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixtures, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6113-1

SECTION 226113 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Dental compressed-air piping, designated "dental air."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Medical compressed-air piping systems include medical air, dental air, instrument air, and

medical laboratory air. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS



A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping

materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems.

C. Retain "Field Quality-Control Reports" Paragraph below if Contractor is retaining "Brazing" Paragraph in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Field quality-control reports: Brazing certificates.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





1. Medical Air Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.

2. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system

inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.

C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 A.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Dental air operating at 80 to 100 psig (550 to 690 kPa).

2.2

PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NFPA 99.

B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K and Type L, seamless, drawn temper. Include standard color marking "MED" or "OXY/MED" in green for Type K tube and in blue for Type L tube.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type.

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.

E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, full-face type.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

F. Flexible Pipe Connectors:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:Flexicraft Industries. a. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. b. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.


A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.

B. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.

2.4 VALVES

A. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Amico Corporation. b. BeaconMedaes. c. Ohio Medical Corporation. d. Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc. e. Tri-Tech Medical.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110. 3. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 5. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 7. Handle: Lever. 8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal. 9. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage

on one copper-tube extension. 10. Positive pressure medical air valves shall have been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and

sealed as for oxygen service, according to CGA G-4.1.

a. Valves shall be delivered sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for installation.

B. Check Valves:




a. Amico Corporation. b. BeaconMedaes. c. Ohio Medical Corporation. d. Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

2. Description: In-line pattern, bronze. 3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 4. Operation: Spring loaded. 5. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions. 6. Positive pressure compressed air valves shall have been manufacturer cleaned, purged,

and sealed as for oxygen service, according to CGA G-4.1.


C. Medical Gas Safety Valves:

1. Bronze body. 2. ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type. 3. Settings to match system requirements. 4. Positive pressure compressed air valves shall have been manufacturer cleaned, purged,

and sealed as for oxygen service, according to CGA G-4.1.


D. Compressed-Air Safety Valves:

1. Bronze body. 2. ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type. 3. Settings to match system requirements. 4. Positive pressure compressed air valves shall have been manufacturer cleaned, purged,

and sealed as for oxygen service, according to CGA G-4.1. a. Valves shall be delivered sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for

installation.

E. Pressure Regulators: 1. Bronze body and trim. 2. Spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type. 3. Manual pressure-setting adjustment. 4. Rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum inlet pressure. 5. Capable of controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig (5.0 kPa for

each 100-kPa) inlet pressure. 6. Positive pressure medical air regulators shall have been manufacturer cleaned, purged,

and sealed as for oxygen service, according to CGA G-4.1. a. Valves shall be delivered sealed and labeled and kept sealed until prepared for

installation.



2.5 MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE CONNECTIONS


1. Amico Corporation. 2. BeaconMedaes. 3. Ohio Medical Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Medical Compressed-Air Service Connections:

1. All positive pressure compressed air service connections shall be manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed as for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.

2. Suitable for specific medical air pressure and service listed. 3. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates. 4. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate. 5. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Roughing-in Assembly:

1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping. 2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when

primary valve is removed. 3. Double seals that will prevent air leakage. 4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 (DN 10) copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking

and tube-end dust cap.

D. Finishing Assembly:

1. Brass housing with primary check valve. 2. Double seals that will prevent air leakage. 3. Cover plate with gas-service label.

E. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections:

1. Outlets for medical air with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange

between services. 2. Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment. 3. With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.

2.6 NITROGEN

A. Comply with USP 32 - NF 27 for oil-free dry nitrogen.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing is not

available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following procedures:

1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,

and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb (0.453 kg) of chemical to 3 gal. (11.3 L) of water.

a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of compressed-air piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install compressed-air piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of

flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.



J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

K. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on

each receiver. Comply with requirements in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

O. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment

requiring compressed-air service.

P. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air

equipment.

C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of

cover when valve is in closed position.

E. Install pressure regulators on compressed-air piping where reduced pressure is required.

F. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet filter of each air compressor.


A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

B. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

"Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.



C. Flanged Joints: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

3.5 COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION

A. Install compressed-air pressure control panel in walls. Attach to substrate.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

D. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

E. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) Insert dimension of each fitting and

coupling.

G. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) minimum rods.

H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4 (DN 8): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 8. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 13 feet (4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 9. NPS 3 (DN 80): 14 feet (4.3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 10. NPS 3-1/2 (DN 90): 15 feet (4.6 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 11. NPS 4 (DN 100): 16 feet (4.9 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).



3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for nonmedical laboratory compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install identifying labels and devices for medical compressed-air piping systems according to

NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:

1. Dental Air: Black letters on yellow background.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING IN

HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical compressed-air piping in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.


1. Medical Compressed-Air Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications,

and certification of medical compressed-air piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical gas piping systems.

2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and ASSE Standard #6010:

a. Initial blowdown. b. Initial pressure test. c. Cross-connection test. d. Piping purge test. e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical compressed-air piping. f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99,

ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030: a. Standing pressure test. b. Individual-pressurization cross-connection test. c. Valve test. d. Master and area alarm tests. e. Piping purge test. f. Piping particulate test. g. Piping purity test. h. Final tie-in test. i. Operational pressure test. j. Medical air purity test. k. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.

4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been

performed and certify report results. Include the following:



a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests.

C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified

above. 3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect tubing from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation"

Article. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.

B. Medical Air Piping installed above-ground: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper

fittings; and brazed joints.

C. Medical Air Piping installed below-ground: Type K, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with

pressure gage on one copper-tube extension. END OF SECTION 226113


VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 6213-1

SECTION 226213 - VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2

SUMMARY


1. Dental vacuum piping, designated "dental vacuum."

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. HVE: High-volume (oral) evacuation.

B. Medical vacuum piping systems include medical vacuum, WAGD, dental vacuum, HVE, and medical laboratory vacuum piping systems.

C. Nonmedical laboratory vacuum piping systems include laboratory low-vacuum and laboratory high-vacuum piping systems.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS


1.5

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical vacuum piping materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99.

C. Brazing certificates.


1.6

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





1. Medical Vacuum Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.

2. Pressure-Seal Joining Procedure for Copper Tubing: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system

inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.

C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 A.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Dental vacuum operating at 12 in. Hg (305 mm Hg).

2.2

PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical vacuum piping materials.

B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in blue.

C. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C), seamless, drawn temper that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

E. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.

F. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.



1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, full-face type.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

G. Pressure-Seal Fittings:


a. Viega LLC.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and

EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

H. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.

I. PVC Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80; socket type.

J. Transition Fittings: PVC socket type with copper threaded insert on one end.

K. Flexible Pipe Connectors:


a. Flexicraft Industries. b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.


A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.

C. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.

D. Solvent Cement for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer complying with ASTM F 656.



2.4 VALVES

A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Amico Corporation. b. BeaconMedaes. c. Ohio Medical Corporation. d. Tri-Tech Medical.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110. 3. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 5. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 7. Handle: Lever. 8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal. 9. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage

on one copper-tube extension.

C. Check Valves:


a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc. b. Amico Corporation. c. BeaconMedaes. d. Ohio Medical Corporation.

2. Description: In-line pattern, bronze.

3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum. 4. Operation: Spring loaded. 5. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

D. PVC Ball Valves:


following:

a. IPEX USA LLC. b. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Standard: MSS SP-122.



3. Description: With union ends and 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and suitable for vacuum service.

E. PVC Butterfly Valves:


following:

a. IPEX USA LLC. b. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: Lug type with lever handle and 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working- pressure rating and suitable for vacuum service.

F. PVC Check Valves:


following:

a. NIBCO INC. b. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: Ball-, in-line-, piston-, or swing-check design with flanged or union ends and 100-psig (690-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and suitable for vacuum service.

2.5 MEDICAL VACUUM SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Amico Corporation. 2. BeaconMedaes. 3. Ohio Medical Corporation. 4. Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

B. General Requirements for Medical Vacuum Service Connections:

1. Suitable for specific medical vacuum service listed. 2. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates. 3. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate. 4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Roughing-in Assembly: 1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping. 2. Brass-body inlet block. 3. Seals that will prevent vacuum leakage. 4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 (DN 10) copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking

and tube-end dust cap.



D. Finishing Assembly:

1. Brass housing with primary check valve. 2. Seals that will prevent vacuum leakage. 3. Cover plate with gas-service label.

E. Quick-Coupler Suction Service Connections:

1. Inlets for medical vacuum with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent

interchange between services. 2. Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment. 3. With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.

F. Vacuum Bottle Brackets: One piece, with pattern and finish matching corresponding service

cover plate.

G. Cover Plates:

1. One piece. 2. Aluminum or stainless steel. 3. Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.

2.6 NITROGEN

A. Comply with USP 32 - NF 27 for oil-free dry nitrogen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing is not

available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following procedures:


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum

piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, vacuum producer sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of vacuum piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.




E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install vacuum piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than piping pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow,

with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

J. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

K. Install thermometer and vacuum gage on inlet piping to each vacuum producer and on each receiver. Comply with requirements in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing and free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections. Extruded-tee branch outlets

in copper tubing may be made where specified.

N. Install medical vacuum piping from medical vacuum service connections specified in this Section, to equipment specified in Section 226219 "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical vacuum service.

O. Install medical vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to

substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.

P. Install medical vacuum bottle bracket adjacent to each wall-mounted medical vacuum service connection suction inlet.

Q. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.

R. Install unions in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each

machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

S. Install unions in PVC vacuum piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

T. Install flanges in PVC vacuum piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger adjacent to flanged valves

and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.



U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of vacuum flow to vacuum-producing

equipment.

C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of

cover when valve is in closed position.

E. Install flexible pipe connectors in suction inlet piping to each vacuum producer. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

E. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Do not use flux. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.

F. PVC-to-Copper Joints: Join transition fitting PVC socket end as solvent-cemented joint to PVC

pipe and join fitting end with insert to copper tube as threaded joint.

G. Flanged Joints:

1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

2. PVC Piping: Install PVC flange on PVC pipes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper and copper-alloy fittings with tools

recommended by fitting manufacturer.



I. Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements. 2. Apply primer and join according to ASME B31.9 and ASTM D 2672 for solvent-

cemented joints. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

D. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

E. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

G. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-)

minimum rods.

H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/4 (DN 8): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 8. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 13 feet (4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 9. NPS 3 (DN 80): 14 feet (4.3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 10. NPS 3-1/2 (DN 90): 15 feet (4.6 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

J. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 30 inches (760 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): 42 inches (1150 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.

K. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1220 mm). 3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for laboratory vacuum piping, valves, and specialties.

Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install identifying labels and devices for medical vacuum piping systems according to

NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:

1. Dental Vacuum: Black boxed letters on white-and-black diagonal stripe background.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL VACUUM

PIPING

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical vacuum piping systems in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.


1. Medical Vacuum Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and

certification of medical vacuum piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical compressed-air piping systems.

2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99

and ASSE Standard #6010:

a. Initial blowdown. b. Initial pressure test. c. Cross-connection test. d. Piping purge test. e. Standing pressure test for vacuum systems. f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99,

ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:

a. Standing pressure test. b. Individual-pressurization cross-connection test. c. Valve test. d. Master and area alarm tests.



e. Piping purge test. f. Final tie-in test. g. Operational vacuum test. h. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.

4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been

performed and certify report results. Include the following:

a. Inspections performed. b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. c. Test methods used. d. Results of tests.

C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified

above. 3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect tubing from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation"

Article. 3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Connect PVC pipe to copper tube with transition fittings.

B. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.

C. Dental Vacuum Piping: Provide piping as one or a combination of the following:

1. Use copper water tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 80 PVC pipe, Schedule 80 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

3.10 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves:

1. Copper Tubing: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819,

copper-tube extensions. 2. PVC Piping:

a. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed

ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions. b. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: PVC butterfly valve.



B. Zone Valves: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-1

SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1.2 COORDINATION



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 A. B.

GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.


2.3

POLYPHASE MOTORS





C. D.

Service Factor: 1.15.

Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.










2.4

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS




2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. See "Multispeed and Variable-Speed Considerations" Article in the Evaluations for

discussion of thermally protected motors. Thermal protection is not usually required for HVAC equipment and energy- Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5

SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS




1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.


C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.




END OF SECTION 23 0513


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0518-1

SECTION 23 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1.2 A.

DEFINITIONS

Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3

ACTION SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS




D. Escutcheons described in "One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type" Paragraph below are generally available in 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) OD, 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) IPS, and 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) IPS. The "brass" oOne-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped steel with polished, chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.


F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed hinge; and spring-

clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Steel with concealed hinge.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece steel or split-plate steel with polished, chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed

hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped

steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping to Remain:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished,

chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished,

chrome-plated finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped

steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with

concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed

hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with

polished, chrome-plated finish.



1. New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: Split floor plate. 2. Existing Piping to Remain: Split floor plate.




A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates. END OF SECTION 23 0518


METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519-1

SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Filled-system thermometers. 3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 4. Light-activated thermometers. 5. Duct-thermometer mounting brackets. 6. Thermowells. 7. Dial-type pressure gages. 8. Gage attachments. 9. Test plugs.


1. Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.



B. Shop Drawings:


1.3 A.


Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.

1.4

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


following:

1. Marsh Bellofram. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: plastic.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:


following:

a. Miljoco Corporation. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.



2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 5-inch nominal diameter. 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and connection to

pointer. 6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F and deg C. 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: plastic. 9. Ring: Metal. 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in

horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and

of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

B. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:


following:

a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter with front

flange and holes for panel mounting. 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F and deg C. 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: plastic. 9. Ring: Metal. 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, back; with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and

of length to suit installation.


12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.



2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Miljoco Corporation. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.


9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range. 2.4 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:


following:

a. Trerice, H. O. Co. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

2. Case: Metal; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Scale(s): Deg F and deg C. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 5. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.



b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

7. Display: Digital. 8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F.

B. Remote-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:


following:

a. Miljoco Corporation. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Case: Plastic, for wall mounting. 3. Scale(s): Deg F. 4. Sensor: Bulb and thermister wire.


5. Display: Digital. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F.

2.5 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold

thermometer stem. 2.6 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.



2.7 DIAL-TYPE PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Marsh Bellofram. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Noshok. d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. e. Trerice, H. O. Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. g. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

B. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


following:

a. Marsh Bellofram. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Noshok. d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. e. Trerice, H. O. Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.



3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter with back flange and holes for panel mounting.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.8 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 2.9 TEST PLUGS


following:

1. Miljoco Corporation. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended

stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber. 2.10 FLOWMETERS

A. Turbine Flowmeters:




a. ONICON Incorporated.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system

served. 4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting in pipe fitting or for installing in piping and

measuring flow directly in gallons per minute.

a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading scale for gas water.

b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 180 deg F.

5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

2.11 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS

A. Ultrasonic, Thermal-Energy Meters:


following:

a. ONICON Incorporated. b. Veris Industries.

2. Description: Meter with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and

connecting wiring. 3. Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter. 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type or strap-on transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack.

a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per

hour or British thermal units. b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.

6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal-energy flow in

kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter

system.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

L. Install test plugs in piping tees.

M. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

N. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements

and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

P. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges.

Q. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

R. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

S. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

T. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

U. Install thermometers in the following locations:



1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank. 7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.

V. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service and

maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Direct-mounted, light-activated type.

B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be one of the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Direct-mounted, light-activated type.

C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central

systems shall be one of the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

D. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger shall be the following:




E. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit shall be the following:


F. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank shall be the following:


G. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be the following:

1. Direct or remote-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type.

H. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.

C. Scale Range for Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 160 deg F and minus 40 to plus 100 deg C.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529-1

SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports.


1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Section 23 0516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors. 3. Section 23 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation

devices. 4. Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction.





B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

1.5 A.


Welding certificates.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:



1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.


A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts.




following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business. b. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Paint Coating: Vinyl alkyd.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or

ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium

silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.



D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof

installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-

steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.




A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon- steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and

MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.



2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and

mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

O. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.


a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.


C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so




3.4 ADJUSTING


B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" and Section 09 9600 "High Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.


E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and

tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.



J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.



K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.



N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 0529


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 23 0548-1

SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers. 12. Snubbers. 13. Restraint channel bracings. 14. Restraint cables. 15. Mechanical anchor bolts. 16. Adhesive anchor bolts. 17. Vibration isolation equipment bases. 18. Restrained isolation roof-curb rails.


1. Section 21 0548 "Vibration Controls for Fire Suppression" for devices for fire-

suppression equipment and systems. 2. Section 22 0548 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing" for devices for plumbing equipment

and systems.

1.2 A. B.

DEFINITIONS

IBC: International Building Code.

ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.3

ACTION SUBMITTALS



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 23 0548 - 2

Cook County Health & Hospital System Issued for 100% CD Hanson Park Clinic Project 04/16/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device required.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and vibration

isolation bases complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight required to select vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment

mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC

piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Welding certificates.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS



following:

a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area. 3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern. 6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.




following:


2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to

support structure.


2.3 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: .





2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring


deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment. 2.4 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: .


following:


2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring


deformation or failure. 6. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt. 2.5 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS



following:

a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.



b. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to

the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring


deformation or failure. 2.6 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part

Telescoping Housing: .



2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad

attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level

equipment.






2.7 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions. 2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psigon isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions. 2.8 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.





following:


2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger- rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


2.10 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression: .





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod. 9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil. 2.11 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


following:

1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.12 RESTRAINT CABLES


following:

1. Gripple Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.



2.13 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.14 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


following:

1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.15 RESTRAINED ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS


following:

1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Thybar Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed

to resiliently support equipment.

C. Upper Frame: The upper frame shall provide continuous support for.



D. Lower Support Assembly: The lower support assembly shall be formed sheet metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper frame. The lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. Adjustable, restrained-spring isolators shall be mounted on elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support

frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.



E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.



9. Test and adjust restrained-air-spring isolator controls and safeties.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


Cook County Health Issued for Bid

Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19

Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-1

SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and

having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.





3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Black or Blue.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White.

4. Background Color: Black or Blue.

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.



following:





1. Brady Corporation. 2. Marking Sevices Inc.

3. Seton Identification Products.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.


J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.






2.4 DUCT LABELS


following:

1. Brady Corporation.

2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.


B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


D. Background Color: Black.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.


J. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.5 VALVE TAGS


following:








B. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-

inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment

hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain or S-hook.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.


2.6 WARNING TAGS


following:




B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.











A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to [15 feetin

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-orange background.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of [25 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by

removable ceiling system.






A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. Refrigerant: 2 inches, round.

b. Gas: 2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.

b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.

c. Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background.

d. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.

e. Compressed Air: White letters on a safety-blue background.

f. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a

safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white

letters on a safety-black background


A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.





TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. An independent third party Commissioning Agent will document completion of the building

HVAC and Electrical Systems. Refer to section 019113 Building Systems Commissioning for

the project Commissioning requirements and roles and responsibilities of each member of the

Commissioning Team.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

c. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.

3. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

b. Boilers.

c. Heat-transfer coils.

4. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.

5. Sound tests.

6. Vibration tests.

7. Duct leakage tests.

8. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.





C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after

approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the

details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system

readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.





G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or

TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a

TAB technician.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to

verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum

walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with

indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting,

or mixing fluid flows.





M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness

for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.

c. Water treatment is complete.

d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.

e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.

f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.

g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.

h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.

i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.

j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.





k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping

Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.





K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,

perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at

terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from the Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.





1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down

the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.

3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure

for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as

follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers

require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific

project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum

airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from

terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.

e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any

deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and

cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be

maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full

cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.





5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total

airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan

speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust

terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan

selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,

perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at

terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow

and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume

air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the

system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the

optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are

within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

d. Mark final settings.

e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data.

f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and

manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and

heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.





B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and

balancing as follows:

1. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure.

3. Check flow-control valves for proper position.

4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

6. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for hydronic

systems.

B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows:

1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated.

2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system.

C. For systems with no diversity:

1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until

design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.





2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential-pressure set

point.

7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency

controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-

frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data

under both conditions.

8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set.


a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

10. Verify that memory stops have been set.

D. For systems with diversity:

1. Determine diversity factor.

2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by

the design engineer.

3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.





1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until

design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.

4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

d. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure, and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were

previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just opened.





9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set

point.

10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency

controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-

frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data

under both conditions.

11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set.


a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

13. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove

proper operation.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Hydronic Boilers:

1. Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Measure and record water flow.

3. Record relief valve pressure setting.





3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding unitary

equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.

2. Airflow.

3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.

4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load.

5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.

6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

3.13 SOUND TESTS

A. After the systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record

sound levels at 10 locations as designated by the Architect.

B. Instrumentation:

1. The sound-testing meter shall be a portable, general-purpose testing meter consisting of a

microphone, processing unit, and readout.

2. The sound-testing meter shall be capable of showing fluctuations at minimum and

maximum levels, and measuring the equivalent continuous sound pressure level (LEQ).

3. The sound-testing meter must be capable of using 1/3 octave band filters to measure mid-

frequencies from 31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz.

4. The accuracy of the sound-testing meter shall be plus or minus one decibel.

C. Test Procedures:

1. Perform test at quietest background noise period. Note cause of unpreventable sound that

affects test outcome.

2. Equipment should be operating at design values.

3. Calibrate the sound-testing meter prior to taking measurements.

4. Use a microphone suitable for the type of noise levels measured that is compatible with

meter. Provide a windshield for outside or in-duct measurements.





5. Record a set of background measurements in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight

un-weighted octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment off.

6. Take sound readings in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight un-weighted octave

bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment operating.

7. Take readings no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall or from the operating

equipment and approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) from the floor, with the meter held or

mounted on a tripod.

8. For outdoor measurements, move sound-testing meter slowly and scan area that has the

most exposure to noise source being tested. Use A-weighted scale for this type of

reading.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record the following:

a. Location.

b. System tested.

c. dBA reading.

d. Sound pressure level in each octave band with equipment on and off.

2. Plot sound pressure levels on NC worksheet with equipment on and off.

3.14 VIBRATION TESTS

A. After systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record

vibration levels on equipment having motor horsepower equal to or greater than [10] [15] [25].

B. Instrumentation:

1. Use portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled vibration meter with or

without a built-in printer.

2. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth, amplitude, and

frequency scale values.

3. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of deflection,

velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second squared.

4. Verify calibration date is current for vibration meter before taking readings.

C. Test Procedures:

1. To ensure accurate readings, verify that accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and is

mounted properly.

2. With the unit running, set up vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect

transducer to meter with proper cables. Hold magnetic tip of transducer on top of the

bearing, and measure unit in mils of deflection. Record measurement, then move

transducer to the side of the bearing and record in mils of deflection. Record an axial

reading in mils of deflection by holding nonmagnetic, pointed transducer tip on end of

shaft.

3. Change vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and record

above measurements.

4. Record CPM or rpm.





5. Read each bearing on motor, fan, and pump as required. Track and record vibration levels

from rotating component through casing to base.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record location and the system tested.

2. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for tests.

3. Verify that vibration limits follow Specifications, or, if not specified, follow the General

Machinery Vibration Severity Chart or Vibration Acceleration General Severity Chart

from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration are normally

"smooth" to "good."

4. Include in report General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions plotted.

3.15 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.16 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:

open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and

variations from indicated conditions.

3.17 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.





B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified

above.

3.18 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.19 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.





11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.





b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).

j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

h. Tube size in NPS (DN).

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.





m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).

o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup

equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.


f. Fuel type in input data.

g. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW).

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.

m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).



b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C).

e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).

i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).

j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).

k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C).

l. Operating set point in Btu/h (kW).

m. Motor voltage at each connection.

n. Motor amperage for each phase.

o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h (kW).

H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in

central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Coil identification.

d. Capacity in Btu/h (kW).





e. Number of stages.

f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.

g. Rated amperage.

h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


a. Heat output in Btu/h (kW).

b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

f. Voltage at each connection.

g. Amperage for each phase.

I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.


f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

g. Number, make, and size of belts.



b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:





1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Duct size in inches (mm).

f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).

k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).



b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).

e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).

g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.


c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.







b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and

include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

N. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.





3.20 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

commissioning authority.

B. Commissioning authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report,

to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business

day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements

checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete

and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final

report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and

request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Architect may contact AABC Headquarters

regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.


3.21 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.





DUCT INSULATION 23 0713-1

SECTION 23 0713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

5. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.


1. Section 23 0719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

2. Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each

type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.



B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation





materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.


following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.

b. Armacell LLC.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.

H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


following:








d. Owens Corning.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,

Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal

density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h

x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.


following:




d. Owens Corning.

J. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or

ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Armacell LLC.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.

b. Armacell LLC.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.





D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.


4. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.



4. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.


A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:





1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White.


A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to

ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.


A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.


C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect.

D. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene






2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene


d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene


E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing

membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a

rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with stucco-

embossed aluminum-foil facing.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.









2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2

inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.

b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is

capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when

self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

5. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,

stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

6. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place

but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.





C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to

ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according

to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.







F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.





3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.


C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves

to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper

sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct

insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.






A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.





1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and

inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.


A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.





3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.


1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation


C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks

and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and

supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified

in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.


B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.





D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be

limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

4. Flexible connectors.

5. Vibration-control devices.

6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.





2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

4. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.

D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



G. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:


H. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of

building exterior shall be one of the following:



I. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:



J. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:



K. Concealed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


L. Concealed, exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:



M. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



N. Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:





1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

O. Exposed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.

P. Exposed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



Q. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



R. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



S. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


T. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


U. Exposed, return-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:



V. Exposed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


W. Exposed, exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


3.13 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for

a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.





2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. [6-lb/cu. ft.] nominal density.

C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 3-lb/cu. ft.] nominal density.


D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



G. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


H. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


I. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.

J. Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



K. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:



L. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:


M. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:


N. Exposed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:







A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.


C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.



HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719-1

SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping, indoors and outdoors. 2. Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.


1. Section 23 0713 "Duct Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.

3. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 4. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 5. Detail application at linkages of control devices.



B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.



B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section

23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.


1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing

and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.




C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according

to ASTM C 795.


F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 4. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type II, Class 2. 6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC.

H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Owens Corning.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with

ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

L. Phenolic:

1. Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with

ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1. 2. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126,

Type II, Grade 1. 3. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ.

M. Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use

as thermal insulation.

1. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging.

2. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less, and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1 inch as tested by ASTM E 84.

3. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

a. Pipe Applications: ASJ.

N. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or

ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.

O. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.




A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Phenolic and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service

temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.

D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.

G. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

H. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.



D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.


A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Polystyrene Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.




A. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.



2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.

F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Film Thickness: 6 mils.



3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.



D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.


4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due

to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through wall penetrations.



1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.


D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section

07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe



insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test

connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION




1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of

cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without



A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.




1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands

without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.




1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming

insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3- and 9-o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness

of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch thickness. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure

according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without


3.10 INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION




1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF POLYSTYRENE INSULATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming

insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3- and 9-o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, and make

thickness same as adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch.



3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.


1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe

insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without



A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.


1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation


C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe

insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.



2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.13 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.



C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL



1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.



C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.15 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each

piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.16 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:


a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. c. Phenolic: 1 inch thick. d. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch thick. e. Polyolefin: 3/4 inch thick.

B. Schedule:

Pipe System

Operating Temp (deg F)

Insulation Type Thickness

Glass Fiber

Flexible Elastomeric

< 1 1 to 1‐1/4

1‐1/2 to 3‐1/2

4 to 6

8 and larger

Hot Water 141 – 200 X X 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

Hot Water 60 – 140 X X 1 1 2 2 2

AC Condensate Drain

40 – 60 X X 1 1 1 1 1

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. d. Phenolic: 1 inch thick. e. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch thick. f. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.



D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.

3.17 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:


a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. c. Phenolic: 2 inches thick. d. Polyisocyanurate: 2 inches thick. e. Polyolefin: 2 inches thick. f. Polystyrene: 2 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. b. Polyolefin: 2 inches thick.

3.18 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.


C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.020 inch thick. END OF SECTION 23 0719


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-1

SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 23 0519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that

relates to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of

a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or

workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds but

selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan

and update process values and outputs at least once per second.



8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. c. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. d. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. e. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. f. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. g. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. h. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. i. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. j. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. k. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. l. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer,

and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.



9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.


A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system

component complies with ASHRAE 135.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices. 2. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 3. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 4. Calibration records and list of set points.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who

is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.

1.8

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.9

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

C. Coordinate equipment with Section 26 0913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

D. Coordinate equipment with Section 26 2416 "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.10 COMMISSIONING

A. An independent third party Commissioning Agent will document completion of the building HVAC Systems. Refer to section 019113 Building Systems Commissioning for the project Commissioning requirements and roles and responsibilities of each member of the Commissioning Team.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM


following: 1. Automated Logic Corporation. 2. Distech Controls. 3. Honeywell Building Solutions; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Johnson Controls, Inc. 5. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as

follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 3.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Core i7, 2.5 MHz, minimum. 3. Random-Access Memory: 8 GB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1920 x 1080 pixels, 512-MB video memory, with TV

out. 5. Monitor: 24 inches, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Solid-State Disk Drive: 256 GB. 8. Hard Disk Drive: Two (2) 2 TB drives. 9. Mouse: Three button, optical. 10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa. 11. Operating System: Windows 10 Pro with high-speed Internet access.

a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and

communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

12. Printer: Black-and-white, laser-jet type as follows:

a. Print Head: 1200 x 1200 dpi resolution. b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 250 sheet trays. c. Print Speed: Minimum of 120 characters per second.

13. Application Software:



a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and

symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:

1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs.

n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management.

14. Custom Application Software:

a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with

debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.

B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable

of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:

1. System: With three integrated USB 3.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),

integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring. 2. Processor: Intel i7, 2.5 MHz. 3. Random-Access Memory: 8 GB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1024 x 768 pixels, 256-MB video memory. 5. Monitor: 17 inches, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 1 TB. 8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 9. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.



C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random- access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from

other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover.

c. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization and security access.

d. Remote communications. e. Maintenance management. f. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit. 5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and

communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or

upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions

include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit.



4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect

points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or

resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,

floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit

connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating

system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication,

and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network



using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.

4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 5. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.

2.5 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as

required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2-1/2 inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.

7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 48 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2

inches. 6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.


7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.



1. Manufacturers:

a. MAMAC Systems, Inc. b. Vaisala.

2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output. 3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.


5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting

plate. 6. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,

suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F. 7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent

relative humidity.

E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;

minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable

for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

6. Building Pressure Sensor: Sensor shall have four switch selectable ranges: 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 in. w.c. Sensor shall have provision for zeroing by pushbutton or digital input. Sensor shall have field selectable outputs of 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, and 4-20 mA. Sensor shall have jumper to select unidirectional or 1-directional mode. Sensor shall have brass-barb fittings. Sensor shall operate from 12-30 Vdc or 24 VAC; power applies to operation in voltage mode only. Sensor shall have LCD display. Sensor accuracy shall be ±1% FS selected range. Sensor overpressure rating shall be 3 PSID proof, and 5 PSID burst. Sensor shall be Honeywell P7640 or equivalent approved by Architect in writing prior to acceptance of bids.

F. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.



2. Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable

range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split- core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered

transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

D. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

E. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match

current and system output requirements.

F. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

2.7 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT


following:

1. Bacharach Inc. 2. Ebtron, Inc. 3. Honeywell Building Solutions; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. TSI Incorporated. 5. Vaisala.

B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors;

suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.

C. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing; suitable

over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting.

D. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity

control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting.

E. Refrigerant Detector: Sensor shall be capable of detection of R-410a in the following ranges of 2,500 ppm, 5,000 ppm, 10,000 ppm. The unit shall be flush mount, white ABS and fit in 2-gang



electrical back-box. The unit shall be NEMA 1. The unit shall be 120 VAC powered 4 Watts max. The unit shall be provided with two configurable (2) SPDT relays: low alarm and high alarm / fault, normal or fail-safe. Alarm Delay 0 to 15 minutes; configurable at 0, 5, 10 and 15 minutes. The unit shall utilize Modbus or Bacnet protocol. Contractor is responsible for providing all equipment to interface the BAS with Modbus protocol. Sensor life 2 year minimum life with recommended 6 month testing and/or recalibration. Provide with CE, UL/CSA/IEC/EN 61010-1 approvals.

2.8 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Duct Airflow Station: Combination of air straightener and multiport, self-averaging pitot tube

station.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Air Monitor Corporation. b. Wetmaster Co., Ltd. c. Ebtron, Inc.

2. Casing: Galvanized-steel frame. 3. Flow Straightener: Aluminum honeycomb, 3/4-inch parallel cell, 3 inches deep. 4. Sensing Manifold: Copper manifold with bullet-nosed static pressure sensors positioned

on equal area basis. 2.9 THERMOSTATS

A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with push-button or lever-

operated fan switch.

1. Label switches "FAN HIGH-MED-LOW-OFF". 2. Mount on single electric switch box.

B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time.



e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch

type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.

D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,

enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded

conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes

in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by

application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is

removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

F. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:

1. Reset: Manual. 2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control

panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.

G. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

H. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable

set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

I. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual-reset

switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.



2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

J. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

2.10 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating

action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 23 0513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at

rated torque.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.



5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 12. Run Time: 30 seconds.

2.11 DAMPERS


following:

1. Air Balance; a division of MESTEK, Inc. 2. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or

0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with

oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable

rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.12 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Section 27 1500

"Communications Horizontal Cabling." PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed

before proceeding with installation.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings

and room details before installation. Install devices at the same elevation as light switches and other devices above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 23 2300

"Refrigerant Piping."

I. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 23 3116 "Nonmetal Ducts."

J. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Section 27 1500 "Communications

Horizontal Cabling." 3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for

Electrical Systems."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 27 1500 "Communications

Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway.



4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables.

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic

duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 6. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators. 7. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 8. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 9. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.



10. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.



8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training."


Cook County Health

Hanson Park Health Center


VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 0923-1

Section 23 09 23.01 - Variable Frequency Controllers (Drives)

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. All sections of Division 22, 23 and 26 apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes the following:

1. Solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMS: Energy Management System.

B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.

C. LAN: Local area network.

D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

F. VFC: Variable frequency controller and variable frequency drive.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. EMS Coordination Information: Provide a list of all read/write and read-only points available

through the user interface. Provide any software, hardware or paperwork that the contractor

installing the EMS will require in order to accomplish the interface.

B. Product Data: For each type of VFC. Include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location for

conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features,

performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




D. Shop Drawings: For each VFC.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,

equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Nameplate legends.

c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.

d. Listed and labeled for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in

combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFCs. Provide schematic

wiring diagram for each type of VFC.

E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required

working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs where pipe and ducts are

prohibited. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent

structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on

each support. Indicate field measurements.

F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

G. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Submit reports documenting the activities required to be

performed in Part 3. These reports are to be submitted two weeks after the startup is completed.

H. Obtain the electrical system one-line diagram from the contract document, provide a harmonic

analysis demonstrating that the proposed VFDs (along with harmonic mitigation equipment

provided) conforms with IEEE 519-1992, Recommended Practices and Requirements for

Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems”

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

J. Training Reports: Submit reports on training documenting dates and attendance.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km)

of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance

and repairs.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

E. Comply with City of Chicago Electrical Code.

F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,

minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with

indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.

G. Components and Installation: Comply with the City of Chicago Building Code.

H. Comply with IEEE 519-1992 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control

in Electrical Power Systems.


A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFCs to protect them from weather, dirt, dust,

corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials

from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full

load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C.

2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing).

3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m).

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,

including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with

indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Outdoor Conditions: Winter -10F DB, Summer 95F DB / 75F WB.

Cook County Health
































devices.





and repairs.



Cook County Health
































devices.





and repairs.



Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping,

equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required

clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

D. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and

control circuits to which they connect.

E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings

and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor

and load.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.

1.10 COORDINATION WITH ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The equipment specified in this section is required to be interfaced with the Energy

Management System (EMS) as specified in section 23 09 00 “Instrumentation and Controls for

HVAC.” Provide all devices, hardware, programming, startup and commissioning required to

establish the interface.

B. Prior to submitting in accordance with Part 1 of this section, coordinate with EMS supplier for

their review and acceptance of the communications interface to be provided. Include evidence

of the coordination and review process with the required submittals for this Section.

C. The equipment supplier is solely responsible for the proper performance of their equipment

provided the correct information is provided through the communications interface.

D. Provide a prefunctional checklist, startup checklist and demonstration report to the Engineer,

CA or owner’s representative for acceptance of system.

E. Provide a startup technician on-site during the establishment of the interface. Coordinate this

activity with the EMS installer.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




G. BACNet or LonWorks compliant manufacturer-provided controls:

1. Provide any information necessary to allow the BACNet compliant device to be directly

connected to the existing network, and send/receive information to the system installed

under section 23 09 00.

2. The EMS shall then read and present the information made available by the equipment

manufacturer, and transmit information receivable by the equipment manufacturer. This

shall be accomplished by user configuration of point information, but shall not require

recompiling or downloading of control programs.

H. Non-BACNet or LonWorks compliant manufacturer-provided controls

1. Provide programming and hardware necessary to integrate information from the

equipment into the EMS.

2. Provide the owner and EMS installer with all documentation necessary to receive point

information required by section 23 09 00 in a communications method compatible with

the EMS.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The variable frequency controller shall be warrantied by the manufacturer for a period of three

years from date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living

expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory-authorized onsite service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer

1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and

arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by

adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium-efficiency motor as defined by

NEMA MG 1.

B. All PWM AC Variable Frequency Drives of 40 hp and above shall be equipped with harmonic

mitigation equipment to prevent power system problems resulting from high levels of reflected

harmonic distortion.”

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




1. The harmonic mitigation equipment shall treat all of the characteristic low frequency

harmonics generated by a 3-phase, diode bridge rectifier load (5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.).

2. The characteristic harmonics shall be suppressed without the need for individual tuning

or the requirement to phase shift against other harmonic sources.

3. Harmonic mitigation shall be by passive inductor/capacitor network or internal phase

shifting transformer. Active electronic components shall not be used.

4. Power factor shall be .98 lagging to .95 leading in operating range from full to half load.

5. To ensure compatibility with engine generators, the harmonic mitigation equipment must

never introduce a capacitive reactive power (KVAR) which is greater than 15% of its

kVA rating.

6. The harmonic mitigation equipment shall not resonate with system impedances or attract

harmonic currents from other harmonic sources.

7. The harmonic mitigation equipment in combination with the Variable Frequency Drive

shall meet all requirements as outlined in the 1992 edition of IEEE std 519 for individual

and total harmonic voltage and current distortion. The Point of Common Coupling

(PCC) for all voltage and current harmonic calculations and measurements shall be the

input terminals to the harmonic mitigation equipment.

8. Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion (THVD) shall meet the requirements of Table 10.2 of

IEEE std 519 by not exceeding 5% and by limiting the individual harmonic voltage

distortion to less than 3%. These limits shall apply while operating on either utility

supply or generator supply when applicable. The harmonic mitigation equipment vendor

shall not be responsible for pre-existing voltage distortion caused by other harmonic

sources.

9. Total Demand Distortion (TDD) of the current at the input terminals of the harmonic

mitigation equipment shall not exceed the limits as defined in Table 10.3 of IEEE std

519. For Isc/IL ratio < 20, TDD must be less than 5%. For all other Isc/IL ratios, the

TDD must not exceed 8% even when Table 10.3 allows for more relaxed limits. For

single-phase applications, the TDD must not exceed 12%.

10. The full load efficiency of the harmonic mitigation equipment / VFD combination shall

be greater than 96%. The harmonic mitigation equipment itself shall have efficiency no

less than 99%.

C. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection

used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

D. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage

range.

E. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 and 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10

percent as indicated on equipment schedules.

2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.

3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.

5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base

load current for 3 seconds.

6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.

7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

F. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.

G. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

H. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.

2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips.

3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 performance.

4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural

frequency of the combination.

5. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

6. Loss-of-phase protection.

7. Reverse-phase protection.

8. Short-circuit protection.

9. Motor overtemperature fault.

I. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a

separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off

controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.

J. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power

after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction.

Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either

direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller,

motor, or load.

K. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption

until motor has stopped.

L. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the

minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

M. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on

output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow

speeds.

N. Input Line Conditioning: dc bus link reactors, isolation transformers, active and passive

harmonic filters, and phase shifting transformers

O. VFC Output Filtering: line inductors, output limit filters, sine wave filters, and motor

termination filters.

P. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

1. Power on.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




2. Run.

3. Overvoltage.

4. Line fault.

5. Overcurrent.

6. External fault.

Q. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual

speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

R. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in

controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Motor speed (rpm).

3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

4. Motor current (amperes).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Fault or alarming status (code).

7. PID feedback signal (percent).

8. DC-link voltage (VDC).

9. Set-point frequency (Hz).

10. Motor output voltage (V).

S. Control Signal Interface:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA)

and 6 programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input

signals from the EMS or other control systems:

a. 0 to 10-V dc.

b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA.

c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.

d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

e. RS485.

f. Keypad display for local hand operation.

3. Output Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to

any of the following:

1) Output frequency (Hz).

2) Output current (load).

3) DC-link voltage (VDC).

4) Motor torque (percent).

5) Motor speed (rpm).

6) Set-point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A)

for remote indication of the following:

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




a. Motor running.

b. Set-point speed reached.

c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).

d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

T. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system

within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be

programmed via EMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the

nonvolatile memory.

U. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, molded-case switch with lockable handle.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure is normally standard. If specialized enclosures are required,

consult manufacturer and insert requirements in this Article.

B. Indoors: NEMA 250, Type 1, Outdoors: NEMA 3R.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-

applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with

control circuit open.

D. Standard Displays:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Set-point frequency (Hz).

3. Motor current (amperes).

4. DC-link voltage (VDC).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Motor speed (rpm).

7. Motor output voltage (V).

E. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date.

2. Running log of total power versus time.

3. Total run time.

4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFCs before

shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements,

installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections

before VFC installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and

motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with

mounting surface.

B. Coordinate mounting and anchoring of VFCs with drawing details. If drawing details are

explicit, delete paragraph below. Retain for floor-mounting equipment.

C. Install VFCs on concrete bases.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural

engineer.

B. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods,"

and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 23 Section "Mechanical

Identification."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions

with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.6 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that

have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for

safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature

cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers. Refer to Division 1 Section

"Testing and Inspection."

B. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance of equipment.

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




C. Schedule training with at least seven days advance notice.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish

to match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended

by manufacturer.

3.11 CONTRACTOR STARTUP AND REPORTING

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by testing organization of tests and observations.

Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of

repairs and adjustments made. Harmonic compliance shall be verified with onsite field

measurements of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the input terminals of the

harmonic mitigating equipment with and without the equipment operating. A recording type

Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonics analyzer displaying individual and total harmonic currents

and voltages must be utilized.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform

the following:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test

and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state

controllers.

3. Report results in writing.

D. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests,

stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION AND COMMISSIONING


adjust, operate, and maintain air handling units.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting up and

shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the equipment. The training

Issued for Bid

06/25/19

Cook County Health




will occur after the startup report has been provided to the owner and the trainer will

provide two (2) Installation and Operations manuals for the use of the owner’s personnel

during training.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data." All required and recommended maintenance will be reviewed as well

as operational trouble shooting. If the IOM does not include a written trouble shooting

guide one will be provided.

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance

notice.

B. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to commissioning agent or designated Owner’s

personnel. The scope of the demonstration will include functional performance requirements

under both local and building automation control as well as any commissioning requirements in

Division 1 or 26.

END OF SECTION

Issued for Bid

06/25/19




CONTROL VALVES 23 0923.11-1

SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control valves and actuators for DDC systems.


1. Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" control equipment

and software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire,

and cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cv: Design valve coefficient.

B. DDC: Direct-digital control.

C. NBR: Nitrile butadiene rubber.

D. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene

E. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean

value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating

process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control

signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical

power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including

temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product

specification sheets.





4. Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.


4. Include diagrams for pneumatic signal and main air tubing.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators, including the

following:

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Pressure differential drop across valve at project design flow condition.

c. Maximum system pressure differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at project minimum flow condition.

d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position.

e. Maximum close-off pressure.

f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential.

g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator.

h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to

scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Control valve installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and

equipment.

2. Size and location of wall access panels for control valves installed behind walls.

3. Size and location of ceiling access panels for control valves installed above inaccessible

ceilings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control valves to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to size products where indicated as delegated design.

D. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

E. Backup Power Source: Systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have

associated control valve actuators served from a backup power source.

F. Environmental Conditions:

1. Provide electric control valve actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the

following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Electric control valve actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with

requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures.

a. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

G. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

H. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

I. Selection Criteria:

1. Control valves shall be suitable for system operating conditions:

2. Control valve shutoff classifications shall be FCI 70-2, Class IV or better unless

otherwise indicated.

3. Valve pattern, three-way or straight through, shall be as indicated on Drawings.

4. Modulating straight-through pattern control valves shall have equal percentage flow-

throttling characteristics unless otherwise indicated.

5. Modulating three-way pattern water valves shall have linear flow-throttling

characteristics. The total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the

valve's position.

6. Modulating butterfly valves shall have linear or equal percentage flow-throttling

characteristics.

7. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Heating Hot Water: Last position.

8. Globe-type control valves shall pass the design flow required with not more than 95

percent of stem lift unless otherwise indicated.





9. Rotary-type control valves, such as ball and butterfly valves, shall have Cv falling

between 65 and 75 degrees of valve full open position and minimum valve Cv between

15 and 25 percent of open position.

10. Selection shall consider viscosity, flashing, and cavitation corrections.

11. Valves shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to

minimum Cv.

12. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure

differential equal to the system design pump head.

13. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv

based on a pressure drop of 5 psig (34 kPa) at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

14. Modulating valve sizes for steam service shall provide a pressure drop at design flow

equal to lesser of the following:

a. 50 percent of the valve inlet pressure.

b. 50 percent of the absolute steam pressure at the valve inlet.

15. Two-position control valves shall be line size unless otherwise indicated.

16. In water systems, use ball- or globe-style control valves for two-position control for

valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly style for valves larger than NPS 2

(DN 50).

17. In steam systems, use ball- or globe-style control valves regardless of size.

18. Pneumatic, two-position control valves shall provide a smooth opening and closing

characteristic slow enough to avoid water hammer. Valves with pneumatic actuators shall

have an adjustable opening time (valve full closed to full open) and an adjustable closing

time (valve full open to full closed) ranging from zero to 10 seconds. Opening and

closing times shall be independently adjustable.

19. Control valve, pneumatic-control signal shall not exceed 200 feet (60 m). For longer

distances, provide an electric/electronic control signal to the valve and an electric

solenoid valve or electro-pneumatic transducer at the valve to convert the control signal

to pneumatic.

2.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Ball Valves with Single Port and Characterized Disk:

1. Ball valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

e. Neles Jamesbury.

2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG.

3. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 38) through NPS 2 (DN 50): Nominal 400 WOG.

4. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig (1379 kPa).

5. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 100 deg C).

6. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B61, ASTM B62, ASTM B584, or forged brass

with nickel plating.

7. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends.

8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze or 300 series stainless steel.





9. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball.

b. Blowout-proof design.

c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

10. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE.

11. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means,

such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be

demonstrated by testing.

12. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

B. Ball Valves with Two Ports and Characterized Disk:

1. Ball valves:



c. NIBCO INC.


e. Neles Jamesbury.

2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG.

3. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 38) through NPS 2 (DN 50): Nominal 400 WOG.

4. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig (1379 kPa).

5. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 100 deg C).

6. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B61, ASTM B62, ASTM B584, or forged brass

with nickel plating.

7. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends.

8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze or 300 series stainless steel.

9. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball.

b. Blowout-proof design.

c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.


11. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means,

such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be

demonstrated by testing.

12. Flow Characteristics for A-Port: Equal percentage.

13. Flow Characteristics for B-Port: Modified for constant common port flow.

C. Pressure-Independent Ball Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Manufacturers:







c. NIBCO INC.


e. Neles Jamesbury.

2. Performance:

a. Pressure Rating: 600 psig (4137 kPa) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and 400 psig (2528 kPa)

for NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 38 and DN 50).

b. Close-off pressure of 200 psig (1379 kPa).

c. Process Temperature Range: Between zero to 212 deg F (minus 18 to plus 100

deg C).

d. Rangeability: 100 to 1.

3. Integral Pressure Regulator: Located upstream of ball to regulate pressure, to maintain a

constant pressure differential while operating within a pressure differential range of 5 to

50 psig (34 to 345 kPa).

4. Body: Forged brass, nickel plated, and with threaded ends.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Stem and Stem Extension: Chrome-plated brass, blowout-proof design.

7. Stem sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging field-applied insulation and insulation vapor barrier seal.


9. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring stem seal with threaded packing ring follower

to retain the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative

means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if equivalent cycle endurance can be

achieved.

10. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

2.3 BUTTERFLY-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Commercial-Grade, Two-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. NIBCO INC.


2. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig (1724 kPa).

b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68.

c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees.

d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

3. Body: Cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A536 or cast steel

ASTM A216/A216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

4. Disc: 316 stainless steel.

5. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel.

6. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE with retaining ring.





7. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel.

8. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings.

9. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

b. Body size.

c. Body and trim materials.

d. Flow arrow.

2.4 GLOBE-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. General Globe-Style Valve Requirements:

1. Globe-style control valve body dimensions shall comply with ISA 75.08.01.

2. Construct the valves to be serviceable from the top.

3. For cage guided valves, trim shall be field interchangeable for different valve flow

characteristics, such as equal percentage, linear, and quick opening.

4. Reduced trim for one nominal size smaller shall be available for industrial valves NPS 1

(DN 25) and larger.

5. Replaceable seats and plugs.

6. Furnish each control valve with a corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating the following:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

b. Body and trim size.

c. Arrow indicating direction of flow.

B. Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Globe Style: Single port.

2. Body: Cast bronze or forged brass with ASME B16.5, Class 250 rating.


4. Bonnet: Screwed.

5. Packing: PTFE V-ring.

6. Plug: Top guided.

7. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass or stainless steel.

8. Process Temperature Range: 35 to 248 deg F (2 to 120 deg C).

9. Ambient Operating Temperature: 35 to 150 deg F (2 to 65 deg C).

10. Leakage: FCI 70-2, Class IV.

11. Rangeability: 25 to 1.

12. Equal percentage flow characteristic.

C. Two-Way Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150):

1. Globe Style: Single port.

2. Body: Cast iron complying with ASME B61.1, Class 125.

3. End Connections: Flanged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges.

4. Bonnet: Bolted.

5. Packing: PTFE cone-ring.

6. Plug: Top or bottom guided.

7. Plug, Seat, and Stem: Brass or stainless steel.

8. Process Temperature Rating: 35 to 281 deg F (2 to 138 deg C).

9. Leakage: 0.1 percent of maximum flow.





10. Rangeability: Varies with valve size between 6 and 10 to 1.

11. Modified linear flow characteristic.

2.5 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Description:

1. Action: Either normally open or normally closed in the event of electrical power failure

as required by the application.

2. Size to close against the system pressure.

3. Manual override capable.

4. Heavy-duty assembly.

5. Body: Brass or stainless steel.

6. Seats and Discs: NBR or PTFE.

7. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.6 SELF-CONTAINED TEMPERATURE REGULATING VALVE

A. Description:

1. Self-contained and self-operated temperature regulating valve. Direct acting or reverse

acting as required by application.

2. Direct Acting: A rise in temperature at the sensing bulb vaporizes some of the liquid in

the bulb, forcing the remaining liquid through a capillary to apply pressure at the

diaphragm, in turn closing the valve. The valve shall fail open.

3. Reverse Acting: A rise in temperature at the sensing bulb vaporizes some of the liquid in

the bulb, forcing the remaining liquid through a capillary to apply pressure at the

diaphragm, in turn opening the valve. The valve shall fail close.

4. Body: Carbon steel.

5. Trim and Seats: 300 series stainless steel.

6. Yoke: Cast iron.

7. Actuator: 300 series stainless steel.


9. Capillary, Bulb, and Armor: 300 series stainless steel.

10. Thermal Fill Material: Match to the temperature range.

11. Thermowell: Type 316 stainless-steel thermowell sized to fit the bulb and pipe.

B. Operational Characteristics: Control flow from between 5 to 100 percent of rated capacity.

C. Interchangeable trim for one size smaller.

D. Valve Leakage: Comply with FCI 70-2, Class IV.

E. Temperature Range: Match application.

1. Drains from Hot Equipment to Sanitary Sewer System: 105 to 165 deg F (40 to 74

deg C).





F. Valve Size: Size to pass the design flow required with not more than 95 percent of the stem lift

while operating at design pressure.

2.7 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS

A. Actuators for Hydronic Control Valves: Capable of closing valve against system pump shutoff

head.

B. Position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator.

C. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

D. Voltage: 24-V ac .

E. Deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to

limit when operated at rated voltage.

F. Function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage.

G. Construction:

1. For Actuators Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper

alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. For Actuators from 100 to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft hardened steel

running in bronze, copper alloy or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally

enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel or cast-aluminum housing.

3. For Actuators Larger Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with

auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

H. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring Return Actuators: Easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field

without replacement.

2. Gear Type Actuators: External manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual

positioning when the actuator is not powered.

I. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

J. Modulating Actuators:

1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either

direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs.

One input drives actuator to open position and other input drives actuator to close

position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates

throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10- or 2- to 10-V dc and 4-

to 20-mA signals.





c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according

to pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry contact closure, triac sink, or source

controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control Input, Position Feedback, and Running Time: Factory or field

programmable.

2) Diagnostic: Feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload,

mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service Data: Include, at a minimum, number of hours powered and number

of hours in motion.

K. Position Feedback:

1. Where indicated, equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive

means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position.

2. Where indicated, equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current

or voltage signal for remote monitoring.

3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and

closed travel limits.

L. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position.

2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power.

3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

M. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions.

2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

N. Valve Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for valve interface, provide an actuator designed to be directly

coupled to valve shaft without the need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to valve drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and

torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two

points of attachment.

O. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with

minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F (minus 29 to plus

49 deg C).

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating

range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.





P. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application.

2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications.

3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications.

4. Provide actuator enclosure with heater and control where required by application.

Q. Stroke Time:

1. Operate valve from fully closed to fully open within 90 seconds.

2. Operate valve from fully open to fully closed within 90 seconds.

3. Move valve to failed position within 30 seconds.

4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

R. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for valves installed in piping to verify actual locations of piping

connections before installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Control Valves:

1. Select from valves specified in "Control Valves" Article to achieve performance

requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system

operation encountered.

2. System, , Two-Way Applications Controlled by Flow: Pressure-independent ball

valves.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.





C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduits to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment

when subjected to a force.

D. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before

proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that

could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent

condition.

E. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically

rated assemblies.

F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force

or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

H. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they will be subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments, including. but not

limited to, the following:

a. Laboratory exhaust airstreams.

b. Process exhaust airstreams.

3. Use Type 316 stainless-steel tubing and fittings when in contact with a corrosive

environment.

4. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel

conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant

coating that is suitable for environment.

5. Where control devices are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive

resistant from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure

constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed

Switches and Circuit Breakers."





C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as

possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with

manufacturer-recommended clearance.

B. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.

C. Install drain valves in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve installed in a

three-valve manifold and for each control valve larger than NPS 2 (DN 50).

D. Install pressure temperature taps in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve

larger than NPS 1 (DN 25).

E. Valve Orientation:

1. Where possible, install globe and ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems

upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.

2. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

3. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems

in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

F. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be

handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of clear space around valve and between

valves and adjacent surfaces.

G. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall,

to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly.

3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is

specified.

4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

H. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel.

2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten

bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.





3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with

requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and

tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at

points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign

materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

B. Wash and shine glazing.

C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine.

3.9 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

4. For pneumatic products, verify air supply for each product is properly installed.

5. For pneumatic valves, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to valve

actuator and positioner.

6. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

7. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

8. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

9. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

10. Verify that valve ball, disc, and plug travel are unobstructed.

11. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace

the valve if leaks persist.

3.10 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100

percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.





B. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and

100 percent open at proper air pressures.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than

30 seconds.

D. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple

positions to confirm proper position indication.



FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123-1

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Manual gas shutoff valves. 5. Motorized gas valves. 6. Earthquake valves. 7. Pressure regulators. 8. Service meters. 9. Dielectric fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and

meter bars.



6. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50). 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and

pressure regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves, pressure regulators, and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.





A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's written permission.

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 10 psig (69 kPa).



B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) but not more than 2 psig (13.8 kPa), and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or

steel pipe to steel pipe. e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory

equipped with anode.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.



a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel,

Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Acetal collets. d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.

6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. b. PE body tube. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Acetal collets. e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.


A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.



3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: [40] [60]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with

50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).

D. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).

E. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.5 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.



B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff



F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.



1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff



G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Plug: Bronze. 3. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 5. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa). 6. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


H. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 2. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 3. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 4. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 5. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 6. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 7. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa). 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


I. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 2. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 3. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 4. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 5. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 6. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 7. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa). 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


J. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40. 1. Body: PE.



2. Ball: PE. 3. Stem: Acetal. 4. Seats and Seals: Nitrile. 5. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping. 6. CWP Rating: 80 psig (552 kPa). 7. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 60 deg C). 8. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation. 9. Include plastic valve extension. 10. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.

K. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in

diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,

and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.6 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES

A. Automatic Gas Valves: Comply with ANSI Z21.21. 1. Body: Brass or aluminum. 2. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 3. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 4. Normally closed. 5. Visual position indicator. 6. Electrical operator for actuation by appliance automatic shutoff device.

B. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429. 1. Pilot operated. 2. Body: Brass or aluminum. 3. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber. 4. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel. 5. 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, and replaceable. 6. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure. 7. Normally closed. 8. Visual position indicator.

2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for

regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.



B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig (690 kPa).

C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).

D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 6. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 7. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).

2.8 SERVICE METERS

A. Diaphragm-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1. 1. Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Connections: Steel threads.



3. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric. 4. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating. 5. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure. 6. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 7. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant. 8. Remote meter reader compatible. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig (690 kPa). 10. Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.5-inch wg (124 Pa). 11. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent.

B. Service-Meter Bars: 1. Malleable- or cast-iron frame for supporting service meter. 2. Include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o-ring seal, and factory- or field-installed

dielectric unions. 3. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service-meter bar dimensions match service-meter

connections.

C. Service-Meter Bypass Fittings: 1. Ferrous, tee, pipe fitting with capped side inlet for temporary natural-gas supply. 2. Integral ball-check bypass valve.



B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.




A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.



E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.



1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.



V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.5 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground, on concrete bases.

B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.

C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.

D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.

E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters.

F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.

G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.



3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.

H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.



B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."



C. Install hangers for steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Install hangers for corrugated stainless-steel tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of steel piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

G. Support vertical runs of corrugated stainless-steel tubing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.11 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.



1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat). d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). d. Color: Gray.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

3.12 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.







1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.14 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.

3.15 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa)

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be one of the following:


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:


C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.



3.17 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa) AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.18 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground:

1. PE valves. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze plug valves. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.

3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.



D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full]-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.



HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113-1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Steel pipe and fittings. 3. Plastic pipe and fittings. 4. Fiberglass pipe and fittings. 5. Joining materials. 6. Transition fittings. 7. Dielectric fittings. 8. Bypass chemical feeder.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining materials. 4. Bypass chemical feeder.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior

walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall

and floor and ceiling assemblies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services. 3. Structural members.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.



E. Preconstruction Test Reports:

1. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.



1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on water quality.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:



1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) at 250 deg F (93 deg C). 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) at 100 deg F (38 deg C). 3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig (552 kPa) at 100 deg F (38 deg C). 4. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F (66 deg C). 5. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F (93 deg C). 6. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F (93 deg C). 7. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,

Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.



2. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

2.5 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. RTRP: ASTM D 2996, filament-wound pipe with tapered bell and spigot ends for adhesive joints.

B. RTRF: Compression or spray-up/contact molded of same material, pressure class, and joining method as pipe.

C. Flanges: ASTM D 4024. Full-face gaskets suitable for the service, minimum 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) thick, 60-70 durometer. ASTM A 307, Grade B, hex head bolts with washers.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.



D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.



B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) or 300 psig (2070 kPa). d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L (Type B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 3 (DN xx) and larger, shall be any of the following:


2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

4. Schedule 40 steel pipe, plain-end mechanical-coupled joints.

C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be[ either of] the following:


D. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K (Type A), annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.

E. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (Type C), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

F. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

G. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

H. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K (Type A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

I. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.



I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to the following:

1. Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping." 2. Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping." 3. Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping." 4. Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping." 5. Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."



Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

U. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples or unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges, flange kits or nipples.



B. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.


1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze.



4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing and steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Install hangers for plastic piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Install hangers for fiberglass piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

H. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and steel piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

I. Support vertical runs of fiberglass piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION



C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.



F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

I. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

K. Plain-End Mechanical-Coupled Joints: Prepare, assemble, and test joints in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

L. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water characteristics:

B. Provide cleaning and chemical treatment per 232500.



C. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated.

1. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above the floor.

2. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections.

3. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) pipe from chemical feeder drain to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

D. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

E. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:



1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.





HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116-1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hydronic specialty valves.

2. Air-control devices.

3. Strainers.

4. Connectors.


1. Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for expansion fittings

and loops.

2. Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for globe valves common to most piping systems.

3. Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for ball valves common to most piping systems.

4. Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for butterfly valves common to most piping systems.

5. Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for check valves common to most piping systems.

6. Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for gate valves common to most piping systems.

7. Section 230923.11 "Control Valves" for automatic control valve and sensor

specifications, installation requirements, and locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of product:

1. Include construction details and material descriptions for hydronic piping specialties.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

3. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-

orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve,

include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.

B. Safety Valves and Pressure Vessels: Shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and

stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Plug: Resin.

4. Seat: PTFE.

5. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

6. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

7. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).

9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

B. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or

venturi.

2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

4. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).






C. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled.

1. Body: Bronze or brass.


3. Seat: Brass.


5. Diaphragm: EPT.

6. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

7. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

D. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled.

1. Body: Bronze or brass.


3. Seat: Brass.


5. Diaphragm: EPT.

6. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

7. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating

pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

E. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

1. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.

2. Flow Control Assembly, provide either of the following:

a. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self-cleaning, and

removable.

b. Elastomeric Diaphragm and Polyphenylsulfone Orifice Plate: Operating ranges

within 2- to 80-psig (14- to 550-kPa) differential pressure.

3. Combination Assemblies: Include bronze or brass-alloy ball valve.

4. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.

5. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.

6. Performance: Maintain constant flow within plus or minus 10 percent, regardless of

system pressure fluctuations.

7. Minimum CWP Rating:[175 psig (1207 kPa).


2.2 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).







B. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8).



C. Bladder-Type ASME Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191

deg C) maximum operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and

supports installed and are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain

required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

D. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

E. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum

working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into

expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;

flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.

5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

F. Air Purgers:

1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from

solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).


2.3 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket.






2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.



B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.

3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.



2.5 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER

1. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; 5-gal. (19-

L) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

a. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

B. Pressure Fill System: Provide a complete factory packaged automatic glycol / make-up water

fill system unit per system as manufactured by Bell & Gossett (GMU) or equal by Taco,

Armstrong as scheduled. The unit shall consist of a base, 55 gallon tank (steel or polyethylene)

with removable lid, fill vent opening, observable fluid level indicator scale (gallons), Y-

strainers, isolation valves, triple combination shut off – Non slam check – calibrated balance

valves, open drip proof motor, pump, expansion tank, motor contactor, pressure controls,

interconnecting piping, low level safety shut down, remote alarm contacts, indicator light, fill

valve (automatic for water systems), discharge pressure gauge, discharge line pressure reducing

valve, isolation valves, pressure gauge and single point power connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

B. Install balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.





D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to

the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.

Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2

(DN 50) and larger.

E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port

ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

F. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge

tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.

2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of

tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building

components and structural members.

G. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that

tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.



HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps. 3. Automatic condensate pump units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Fluid Technology, Inc 2. Bell & Gossett, a Xylem Inc. brand 3. Taco

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.


2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



2.2 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS

A. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- (1800-mm-) minimum, electrical power cord with plug.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern. 2. 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. 3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.



D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install check valve and throttling valve with memory stop or triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.



J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

K. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.



REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300-1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings. 2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties. 3. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves. b. Solenoid valves. c. Hot-gas bypass valves. d. Filter dryers. e. Strainers. f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes; flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs; oil traps; double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection details.

2. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

3. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 4. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50).







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa). 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig (3689 kPa).


A. Copper Tube: Type K or Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:



1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment in minimum

7-inch- (180-mm-) long assembly. 4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

B. Packed-Angle Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

C. Check Valves: 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig (3.4 kPa). 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

D. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).

E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).



1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and [24] [115] [208]-V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig (4820 kPa).

H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Equalizer: Internal. 7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter and 115-V ac coil. 8. End Connections: Socket. 9. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig (34 kPa). 10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

I. Straight-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

J. Angle-Type Strainers:



1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm). 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

N. Receivers: Comply with AHRI 495. 1. Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an

NRTL. 2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve. 5. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).



O. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with AHRI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.

C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 3-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.



2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.





I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures:

1. Shot blast the interior of piping. 2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing

by means of a wire or electrician's tape. 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.

Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube

or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be

open to allow unrestricted flow.

R. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

S. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."



T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION



C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and to restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."



B. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.


1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.



2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14 kPa). 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.



HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 2500-1

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. Manual and automatic chemical-feed equipment and controls. 2. Ozone-generator biocide equipment and controls. 3. Stainless steel pipes and fittings. 4. UV-irradiation unit, biocide equipment, and controls. 5. Chemical-treatment test equipment. 6. Chemicals. 7. HVAC makeup-water softeners. 8. RO equipment for HVAC makeup water. 9. TDS controllers. 10. TSS controllers. 11. Water-filtration equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory.

B. PPM: Parts per million.

C. RO: Reverse osmosis.

D. TDS: Total dissolved solids consist of salts and other materials that combine with water as a solution.

E. TSS: Total suspended solids include both organic and inorganic solids that are suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. Water meters.



3. Inhibitor injection timers. 4. pH controllers. 5. TDS controllers. 6. TSS controllers. 7. Biocide feeder timers. 8. Chemical solution tanks. 9. Injection pumps. 10. Ozone generators. 11. UV-irradiation units. 12. Chemical test equipment. 13. Chemical material safety data sheets. 14. Inhibited ethylene glycol. 15. Inhibited propylene glycol. 16. Water softeners. 17. RO units. 18. Multimedia filters. 19. Self-cleaning strainers. 20. Replaceable bag- or cartridge-type filters. 21. Centrifugal separators.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment equipment and chemical- and ozone-generator-biocide- and UV-irradiation-biocide- treatment equipment, showing tanks, maintenance space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power and control wiring.


A. Water-Analysis Provider Qualifications: Verification of experience and capability of HVAC water-treatment service provider.


C. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in "Performance Requirements" Article.

D. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.

E. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized-steel surfaces, and confirm this observation in a letter to Architect.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, injection pumps, water softeners, RO equipment, water-filtration units, and controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider, capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HVAC WATER-TREATMENT MANUFACTURERS

A. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc.

B. Nalco Chemical Company


A. Provide all hardware, chemicals, and other material necessary to maintain HVAC water quality in all systems as indicated in this Specification. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or to the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating below 250 deg F (120 deg C) shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5. 2. Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Retain first subparagraph below for systems that do not contain glycol. 5. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 6. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 7. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 8. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 9. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 10. Scale Control: Provide softened water for initial fill and makeup. Where softened water

is not used, provide sufficient scale inhibitors to prevent formation of scale and maintain all scale-forming material in solution.

11. Dispersants: Provide sufficient dispersants to prevent sedimentation of fine particulate matter.

12. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL.



e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL.

D. Passivation for Galvanized Steel:

1. Passivation of all galvanized-steel cooling towers and other system components must be conducted strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in order to validate warranties. During the required passivation period, all water-quality parameters must be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and all other requirements must be observed.

2.3 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 (DN 20) bottom inlet and top side outlet. Provide quarter- turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm arranged to lock the top onto the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. Provide a NPS 3/4 IN (DN 20) quarter-turn valve on inlet and outlet.

1. Capacity: 2 gal. (7.6 L). 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa).

2.4 AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Water Meter, Oscillating Piston:

1. AWWA C700, oscillating-piston, magnetic-drive, totalization meter. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4. Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: 3 psig (20 kPa). 5. Registration: Gallons (Liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters). 6. End Connections: Threaded. 7. Controls: Flow-control switch with normally open contacts, rated for maximum

10 A, 250-V ac, that will momentarily close at adjustable increments of total flow. 8. Provide an electronic or digital interface for flow rate indication at central

workstation compatible with DDC system, as described in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." Low-voltage signal must be capable of transmitting 1000 feet (305 m).

9. All electrical components, devices, and accessories must be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and must be marked for intended location and application.

B. Water Meter, Turbine Type, Threaded:

1. AWWA C701, turbine-type, totalization meter. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 100 psig (690 kPa). 4. Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: 3 psig (20 kPa). 5. Registration: Gallons (Liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters). 6. End Connections: Threaded.



7. Controls: Flow-control switch with normally open contacts, rated for maximum 10 A, 250-V ac, that will momentarily close at adjustable increments of total flow.

8. Provide an electronic or digital interface for flow rate indication at central workstation compatible with DDC system, as described in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." Low-voltage signal must be capable of transmitting 1000 feet (305 m).


C. Water Meter, Turbine Type, Flanged:

1. AWWA C701, turbine-type, totalization meter. 2. Body: Bronze. 3. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4. Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: 3 psig (20 kPa). 5. Registration: Gallons (Liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters). 6. End Connections: Flanged. 7. Controls: Flow-control switch with normally open contacts, rated for maximum

10 A, 250-V ac, that will momentarily close at adjustable increments of total flow. 8. Provide and electronic or digital interface for flow rate indication at central

workstation compatible with DDC system, as described in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." Low-voltage signal must be capable of transmitting 1000 feet (305 m).


D. Inhibitor Injection Timers:

1. Microprocessor-based controller with digital display in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop and status indication at central workstation.

2. Programmable timers with infinite adjustment over full range, mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.

3. Test switch. 4. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump. 5. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated. 6. Programmable lockout timer with indicator light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump

and activate alarm circuits. 7. Digital display makeup totalizer to measure amount of makeup and bleed-off water from

two water meter inputs.

E. pH Controller:

1. Microprocessor-based controller, 1 percent accuracy in a range from zero to 14 units. Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and digital display in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop and status indication at central workstation.

2. Digital display and touch pad for input. 3. Sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.



4. High, low, and normal pH indication. 5. High or low-pH-alarm-light trip points, field adjustable; with silence switch. 6. Hand-off-auto switch for acid pump. 7. Internal adjustable hysteresis or deadband.

F. TDS Controller:

1. Microprocessor-based controller, 1 percent accuracy in a range from zero to 5000 micromhos. Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and digital display in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop and status indication at central workstation.

2. Digital display and touch pad for input. 3. Sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold. 4. High, low, and normal conductance indication. 5. High- or low-conductance-alarm-light trip points, field adjustable; with silence switch. 6. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve. 7. Bleed-off valve activated indication. 8. Internal adjustable hysteresis or deadband. 9. Bleed Valves:

a. Cooling Systems: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, general-purpose solenoid with continuous-duty coil, or motorized valve.

b. Steam Boilers: Motorized ball valve, steel body, and TFE seats and seals.

G. TSS Controller:

1. Microprocessor-based controller, 1 percent accuracy in a range from 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L. Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and digital display in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure. Interface for start/stop and status indication at central workstation.

2. Forms of digital communication: MODBUS RS-232 or MODBUS RS-485. 3. Digital display and touch pad for input. 4. Sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold. 5. High- or low-value-alarm-light trip points, field adjustable; with silence switch. 6. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve. 7. Bleed-off valve activated indication. 8. Internal adjustable hysteresis or deadband.

H. Biocide Feeder Timer:

1. Microprocessor-based controller with digital display in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop and status indication at central workstation.

2. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day. 3. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer and clock-controlled biocide pump timer.

Prebleed and bleed lockout timers. 4. Solid-state alternator to enable use of two formulations. 5. 24-hour display of time of day. 6. 14-day display of day of week. 7. Battery backup, so clock is not disturbed by power outages. 8. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps. 9. Biocide A and Biocide B pump running indication.



I. Chemical Solution Tanks:

1. Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque polyethylene with minimum 110 percent containment vessel.

2. Molded cover with recess for mounting pump. 3. Capacity: 30 gal. (114 L).

J. Chemical Solution Injection Pumps:

1. Self-priming, positive displacement; rated for intended chemical with minimum 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.

2. Adjustable flow rate. 3. Metal and thermoplastic construction. 4. Built-in relief valve. 5. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, single-phase motor. Comply with requirements in

Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


K. Chemical Solution Tubing: Polyethylene tubing with compression fittings and joints, except ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 stainless steel for steam boiler injection assemblies.

L. Injection Assembly:

1. Quill: Minimum NPS 1/2 (DN 15) with insertion length sufficient to discharge into at least 25 percent of pipe diameter.

2. Ball Valve: Two-piece stainless steel, as described in "Stainless Steel Pipes and Fittings" Article; selected to fit quill.

3. Packing Gland: Mechanical seal on quill of sufficient length to allow quill removal during system operation.

4. Assembly Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 600 psig (4137 kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C).

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Stainless Steel Tubing: Comply with ASTM A269/A269M, Type 316.

B. Stainless Steel Fittings: Comply with ASTM A815/A815M, Type 316, Grade WP-S.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless Steel Ball Valves: ASTM A351/A351M, Type 316 stainless steel body; ASTM A276/A276M, Type 316 stainless steel stem and vented ball, carbon-filled TFE seats, threaded body design with adjustable stem packing, threaded ends, and 250-psig (1725-kPa) steam working pressure and 600-psig (4140-kPa) cold working pressure ratings.

D. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless Steel Ball Valves: ASTM A351/A351M, Type 316 stainless steel body; ASTM A276/A276M, Type 316 stainless steel stem and vented ball, threaded body design with adjustable stem packing, threaded ends, and 150-psig (1035-kPa) steam working pressure and 600-psig (4140-kPa) cold working pressure rating.



2.6 CHEMICAL-TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounted cabinet for testing pH, TSS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests for high-pressure boilers; and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems.

B. Sample Cooler:

1. Tube: Sample.

a. Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) tubing. b. Material: ASTM A666, Type 316 stainless steel. c. Pressure Rating: Minimum 2000 psig (13 790 kPa). d. Temperature Rating: Minimum 850 deg F (454 deg C).

2. Shell: Cooling water.

a. Material: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. b. Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa). c. Temperature Rating: Minimum 450 deg F (232 deg C).

3. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Tube: Sample.

1) Flow Rate: 0.25 gpm (0.016 L/s). 2) Entering Temperature: 400 deg F (204 deg C). 3) Leaving Temperature: 88 deg F (31 deg C). 4) Pressure Loss: 6.5 psig (44.8 kPa).

C. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.

1. Two station rack for closed-loop systems.

2.7 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

B. Chemicals for direct steam injection humidification and for steam used in direct contact with food to be FDA approved and safe for these uses.

2.8 HVAC MAKEUP-WATER SOFTENER

A. Description: Twin mineral tanks and one brine tank, factory mounted on skid.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fabricate supports and attachments to tanks with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event, when tank supports are anchored to building structure as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Mineral Tanks:

1. Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Fabricate and label fiber-reinforced plastic filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, if indicated.

3. Pressure Rating: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum. 4. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 40 to at least 100 deg F (5 to

at least 38 deg C). 5. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum, for backwash expansion above the normal resin bed

level. 6. Support Legs or Skirt: Constructed of structural steel, welded or bonded to tank before

testing and labeling. 7. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized on exterior and interior of tank after fabrication. 8. Upper Distribution System: Single-point type, fabricated from galvanized-steel pipe and

fittings. 9. Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type; fabricated from

PVC pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging polyethylene strainers; arranged for even-flow distribution through resin bed.

E. Controls: Automatic; factory mounted on mineral tanks and factory wired.

1. Adjustable duration of regeneration steps. 2. Push-button start and complete manual operation override. 3. Pointer on pilot-control valve shall indicate cycle of operation. 4. Means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails. 5. Main Operating Valves: Industrial, automatic, multiport, diaphragm type with the

following features:

a. Slow opening and closing, nonslam operation. b. Diaphragm guiding on full perimeter from fully open to fully closed. c. Isolated dissimilar metals within valve. d. Self-adjusting, internal, automatic brine injector that draws brine and rinses at

constant rate independent of pressure. e. Float-operated brine valve to automatically measure the correct amount of brine to

the softener, and refill with fresh water. f. Sampling cocks for soft water.

6. Flow Control: Automatic control of backwash and flush rates over variations in operating pressures that do not require field adjustments. Equip mineral tanks with automatic-reset-head water meter that electrically activates cycle controller to initiate regeneration at preset total in gallons (liters) and that automatically resets after regeneration to preset total in gallons (liters) for next service run. Include alternator to regenerate one mineral tank with the other in service.



F. Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.

1. Tank and Cover Material: Fiberglass a minimum of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick; or molded polyethylene a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick.

2. Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine withdrawn and freshwater refill.

3. Size: Large enough for at least four regenerations at full salting.

G. Factory-Installed Accessories:

1. Piping, valves, tubing, and drains. 2. Sampling cocks. 3. Main-operating-valve position indicators. 4. Water meters.

H. Water Test Kit: Include in wall-mounted enclosure for water softener.

2.9 FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

A. Multimedia Filters: 1. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex, multimedia filter system, consisting

of filter tank, media, strainer, circulating pump, piping, and controls for removing particles from water.

a. Filter Tank: Corrosion resistant with distribution system and media.


a. Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. Fabricate and label FRP filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, if indicated.

c. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

d. Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5 or grooved in accordance with AWWA C606.

e. FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral; Designation E, 125-psig (0.862-MPa) or Designation F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges of grade same as tank material, in accordance with ASTM D5421.

f. Motorized Valves: Flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron butterfly type with EPDM valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B148 aluminum bronze disc.

g. Strainer: Basket type mounted on pump suction. h. Piping: ASTM A53/A53M; Type S, F, or E; Grade B; Schedule 40 black steel,

with flanged, grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding or ductile-iron fittings.



i. Piping: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

j. Safety Valves: Automatic pressure relief. k. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction,

centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

1) Casing: Radially split, cast iron. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. 3) Impeller: ASTM B584 cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced,

closed, and keyed to shaft. 4) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 5) Seal: Mechanical. 6) Motor: Open, dripproof motor supported on the pump-bearing frame.

General requirements for motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

l. Controls: Automatic control of circulating pump and tank backwash; factory wired for single electrical connection.

1) Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure with time clock and pressure gages. 2) Pump: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position bypasses

safeties and controls. 3) Backwash: Automatic; with time clock and differential pressure switch. 4) Backwash Valve: Tank mounted with valves interlocked to single actuator.

m. Support: Skid mounting. Fabricate supports, base, and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event, when filter base is anchored to building structure.

B. Self-Cleaning Strainers: 1. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, ASTM A126, Class B, cast-iron or steel, self-

cleaning strainer system of tank, strainer, backwash arm or cleaning spiral, drive and motor, piping, and controls for removing particles from water.

a. Fabricate and label ASTM A126, Class B, cast-iron or steel strainer tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. Pipe Connections:

1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded in accordance with ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges in accordance with

ASME B16.5 or grooved in accordance with AWWA C606.

2. Motorized Valves: Flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron angle type with EPDM valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B148 aluminum bronze disc.

3. Strainer: ASTM A666, Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Piping: ASTM A53/A53M; Type S, F, or E; Grade B; Schedule 40 black steel, with

flanged, grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding or ductile-iron fittings. 5. Safety Valves: Automatic pressure relief. 6. Backwash Arm Drive:

a. Drive Casing: Cast iron.



b. Worm Gears: Immersed in oil. c. Motor: Open, dripproof motor supported on the strainer-bearing frame. General

requirements for motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

7. Controls: Automatic control of backwash; factory wired for single electrical connection.

a. Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure with time clock and pressure gages. b. Backwash Arm Drive: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position

bypasses safeties and controls. c. Backwash: Automatic; with time clock and differential pressure switch. d. Backwash Valve: Electric actuator.

8. Support: Skid mounting. Fabricate supports, base, and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist strainer movement during a seismic event, when strainer base is anchored to building structure.

C. Cartridge-Type Filters: 1. Description: Floor-mounted housing with filter cartridges for removing particles from

water.

a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate inlet from outlet and to direct inlet through cartridge-type water filter; with base, feet, or skirt.

1) Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) Steel Housing Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5 or grooved in accordance with AWWA C606.

3) Plastic Housing Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 150-psig (1035-kPa) plastic flanges.

b. Cartridge: Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.

2. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Filter Design: 1) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent. 2) Particle Size: 10 microns and larger. 3) Clean Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 4) Pressure Loss at Replacement: 6 psig (41 kPa).

D. Centrifugal Separators: 1. Description: Simplex separator housing, with baffles and chambers for removing

particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity. 2. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.

a. Construction: Fabricate and label steel separator housing to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of feedwater.



c. Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation of particles.

d. Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles. e. Outlet: Near top of unit. f. Purge: At bottom of collection chamber. g. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded in accordance with

ASME B1.20.1. h. Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges in

accordance with ASME B16.5 or grooved in accordance with AWWA C606. Provide stainless steel flanges if tank is stainless steel.

3. Motorized Purge Valve: Gate or plug pattern valve.

a. Motorized Valves: Butterfly-type, flanged or grooved-end, ductile-iron body, with EPDM valve seat and stem seal; with ASTM B148 aluminum bronze disc.

b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

4. Strainer: Stainless steel basket type mounted on pump suction. 5. Piping, Steel: ASTM A53/A53M; Type S, F, or E; Grade B; Schedule 40 black steel,

with flanged, grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding or ductile-iron fittings.

6. Piping, Copper: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

7. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. c. Impeller: ASTM B584 cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

and keyed to shaft. d. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. e. Seal: Mechanical. f. Motor: Open, dripproof motor supported on the pump-bearing frame. General

requirements for motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

g. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

8. Controls: Automatic control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory wired for single electrical connection.

a. Panel: NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure. b. Pump: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position bypasses safeties

and controls. c. Separator Purge: Automatic and manual. d. TSS Controller Interlock: Open separator purge valve with bleed-off control.



9. Support: Skid mounting. Fabricate supports, base, and attachment to separator housing with reinforcement strong enough to resist separator movement during a seismic event, when separator base is anchored to building structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical-application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units, so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate. Install all chemical application equipment within a spill-containment area without floor drains.

B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories, and anchor to building structure. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.

C. Install water-testing equipment on wall near water-chemical-application equipment.

D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical-treatment controls and sensors.

E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

F. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating, and equip with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder

inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.

G. Install automatic fluid make-up equipment for glycol water system and include the following:

1. Chemical solution tanks. 2. Chemical solution injection pumps. 3. Water meter in makeup supply to system. 4. Pressure switch to operate injection pump as necessary to maintain glycol system

pressure.

H. Install automatic chemical-feed equipment for steam boiler and steam condensate systems and include the following:



1. Install makeup-water softener. 2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install inhibitor injection pumps and solution tanks with injection-timer-sensing contacts

in water meter.

a. Pumps shall operate for timed interval when contacts close at water meter in makeup-water supply connection.

4. Install test equipment and furnish test-kit to Owner. 5. Install RO unit for makeup water. 6. Install TDS controller with sensor and bleed valves.

a. Bleed valves to cycle, to maintain maximum TDS concentration.

7. Install TSS controller with sensor and bleed valves.

a. Bleed valves to cycle, to maintain maximum TSS concentration.

8. Install inhibitor injection timer with injection pumps and solution tanks.

a. Pumps shall operate for timed interval on contact closure at water meter in makeup-water supply connection. Injection pump shall discharge into main steam supply header.

I. Install automatic chemical-feed equipment for open condenser water and include the following:

1. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 2. Install inhibitor injection pumps and solution tanks with injection-timer-sensing contacts

in water meter.

a. Pumps shall operate for timed interval on contact closure at water meter in makeup-water supply connection. Injection pump shall discharge into boiler feedwater tank or feedwater supply connection at boiler.

3. Install test equipment, and provide test-kit to Owner. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

4. Install TDS controller with sensor and bleed valves.

a. Bleed valves to cycle, to maintain maximum TDS concentration.

5. Install TSS controller with sensor and bleed valves.

a. Bleed valves to cycle, to maintain maximum TSS concentration.

6. Install pH sensor and controller with injection pumps and solution tanks.

a. Injector pumps shall operate to maintain required pH.

7. Install biocide feeder alternating timer with two sets of injection pumps and solution tanks.

a. Injection pumps shall operate to feed biocide on an alternating basis.



8. Install ozone generator with diffusers in condenser-water piping.

a. Ozone generator shall operate continuously with condenser-water flow.

9. Install UV-irradiation lamps in condenser-water piping.

a. UV lights shall operate continuously with condenser-water flow.

3.3 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION

A. Install water softener equipment on concrete bases level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units, so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor mineral and brine tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Install seismic restraints for tanks and floor-mounting accessories, and anchor to building structure. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.

C. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by equipment manufacturer but not factory installed.

D. Prepare mineral-tank distribution system and underbed for minerals, and place specified mineral into mineral tanks.

E. Install water-testing sets on wall adjacent to water softeners.


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

E. See Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup-water connections to potable-water systems.


A. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment.



B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."







1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation, and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC system's startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping until no leaks exist.

F. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


H. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five weeks, and prepare test report, advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to "Performance Requirements" Article for each required characteristic. Sample boiler water at six-week intervals following the testing noted above to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section.



I. At six-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis, advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to "Performance Requirements" Article.

J. Comply with ASTM D3370 and with the following standards:

1. Silica: ASTM D859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D1066. 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D1126.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above, to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for heating, hot-water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially

fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical analysis. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.

B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact operating procedures of equipment. When training is complete, turn over video to Owner for future use.



METAL DUCTS 23 3113-1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Double-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. 4. Double-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. 5. Sheet metal materials. 6. Duct liner. 7. Sealants and gaskets. 8. Hangers and supports. 9. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.

3. Section 233119 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

4. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California).


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of all duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Welding certificates.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum

supports. 3. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

F. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 304 stainless steel indicated by

manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches (914 mm), select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches (914 mm) or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-



support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application.

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for clear internal dimensions of the inner duct.

B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct outer duct of Type 304 stainless steel indicated

by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches (914 mm), select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches (914 mm) or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application.

E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.



F. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II for sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


G. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gauge (0.7-mm) solid galvanized sheet steel.

2.4 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 304 sstainless steel indicated by

manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 (1524) Inches (mm) in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."



2.5 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.

1. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch.3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

a. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. b. For ducts exposed to weather, construct outer duct of Type 304 stainless steel

indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 (1524) Inches (mm) in Diameter: Flanged.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

4. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gauge (0.7-mm),solid galvanized sheet steel.

C. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.



D. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II for sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


2.6 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. PVC-Coated, Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Minimum Thickness for Factory-Applied PVC Coating: 4 mils (0.10 mm) thick on sheet

metal surface of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions, and minimum 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick on opposite surface.

3. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).



2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches (76 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative. 9. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.



2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and



calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

J. Install fire, combination fire/smoke, and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as required by code, and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation requirements of the damper UL listing.

K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches (300

mm) and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches (350 mm) and larger.

N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.



3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. All external joints are to be welded. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction.

B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather. Provide necessary supporting structures.

C. Single Wall:

1. Ductwork shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel.

a. If duct outer surface is uninsulated, protect outer surface with suitable paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

3. Where ducts have external insulation, provide weatherproof aluminum jacket. See Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

D. Double Wall:

1. Ductwork shall comply with requirements in "Double-Wall Rectangular Ducts and Fittings" or "Double-Wall Round and Flat-Oval Ducts and Fittings" Article.

2. Ductwork outer wall shall be Type 304 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.

3. Provide interstitial insulation.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."



B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and

Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500

Pa): Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower:

Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500

Pa): Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1220 mm) of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.



3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (750 Pa): Test representative duct sections, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- (500) Inch wg (Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

c. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- (500) Inch wg (Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- (500) Inch wg (Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

e. Outdoor-Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- (500) Inch wg (Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.



6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in

accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. For cleaning of existing ductwork, see Section 230130.52 "Existing HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning."

C. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

D. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

E. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

F. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).



2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

G. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.10 STARTUP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.11 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below.

B. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts (constant volume units): +2” 2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): +4” 3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): +2” 4. Supply Ducts (between fan and first system fire damper): +8”



5. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): -2” 6. Return Ducts (between nearest fire damper and return fan inlet): -4” 7. Return Ducts (return fan discharge and AHU intake/exhaust damper): -4” 8. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): -2”

C. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel 2. PVC-Coated Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

3. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.

D. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.



b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 (305) Inches (mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 (356) Inches (mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

E. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33300-1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Barometric relief dampers. 3. Manual volume dampers. 4. Control dampers. 5. Fire dampers. 6. Ceiling radiation dampers. 7. Smoke dampers. 8. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 9. Corridor dampers. 10. Flange connectors. 11. Duct silencers. 12. Turning vanes. 13. Remote damper operators. 14. Duct-mounted access doors. 15. Flexible connectors. 16. Duct security bars. 17. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Section 233346 "Flexible Ducts" for insulated and non-insulated flexible ducts. 2. Section 233723 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps. 3. Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors. 4. Section 284621.13 "Conventional Fire-Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.



1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and

corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Duct security bars. f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industrier, Inc 2. Ruskin Company, a brand of Johnson Controls 3. Greenheck 4. Vent Products Co. 5. Price

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.

D. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted,, maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges.

E. Blade Action: Parallel.

F. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

G. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Stainless steel . 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (5 mm).

H. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

I. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.



J. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

K. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage (1.0 mm) minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Aluminum. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Nailor Industrier, Inc b. Ruskin Company, a brand of Johnson Controls c. Greenheck d. Vent Products Co. e. Price

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Stainless-steel sleeve. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.



B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers:


2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with

flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.




8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

C. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers:


2. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 3. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified

Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 5. Frames:

a. Hat shaped. b. 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. c. Mitered and welded corners. d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

6. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.



d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.




9. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 10. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 12. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

D. Low-Leakage, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers:


2. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 3. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified

Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 5. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with

flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 6. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet. d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.


a. Stainless-steel sleeve]. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have


9. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 10. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 12. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.



E. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch (13-mm)) diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS


B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Hat or Angle shaped. 2. 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of [6 inches (152 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)]. 2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel. 4. 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick single skin or 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

F. Bearings:



1. Stainless-steel sleeve. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS


B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (1-kPa) static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm (10-m/s) velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) or 0.39 inch (9.9 mm) thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch- (0.61-mm) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.



C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.8 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Hollow Vane and Rail (Double Wall Vane) 2. Krueger-HVAC, Division of Air System Components 3. Ruskin Company, a brand of Johnson Controls 4. Titus HVAC, a brand of Johnson Controls

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Double wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.9 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries, Inc 2. Ruskin Company, a brand of Johnson Controls 3. CESCO Products 4. Ductmate Industries 5. Greenheck 6. Vent Products Co.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel.



d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm)butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to [18 Inches (460 mm)] Square: Continuous and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.10 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries, Inc 2. Ruskin Company, a brand of Johnson Controls 3. CESCO Products 4. Ductmate Industries 5. Greenheck 6. Vent Products Co.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch (1.3-mm) carbon steel.

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F (1093 deg C).

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Connector Plus G90 Steel Offset Seam Neoprene

Fabric: www.carlislehvac.com/#sle. 2. Ductmate Industries 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.



D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] [5-3/4 inches (146 mm)] wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the

filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.



G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.



H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.



I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.


deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm)

movement at start and stop.



2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 includes Section 6.4.3.3.3 - "Shutoff Damper Controls," restricts the use of backdraft dampers, and requires control dampers for certain applications. Install backdraft or control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch (4.18-mm)steel sleeve, continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel bars, 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. in each direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar. Weld 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch (63-by-63-by-6-mm) steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of sleeve. Connect duct security bars to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) hinged access panel with cam lock in duct in each side of sleeve.

I. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.

J. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:



1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated.

K. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

L. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

M. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

N. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

Q. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

R. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

S. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:



1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.





HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Axial roof ventilators.

2. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.

3. Centrifugal ventilators - roof downblast.

4. Centrifugal ventilators - roof upblast and sidewall.

5. Sidewall propeller fans.

6. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.



1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Prefabricated roof curbs.

9. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.





1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration isolation bases.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, or BIM model,

drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section and coordinated with all building

trades.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: For fans, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and

emergency operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design

criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: HVAC power ventilators shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.





2.2 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST

A. Housing: Downblast; removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-

piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

B. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

C. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch

adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

D. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to

less than 50 percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

6. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction.

7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.

E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-)

thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer.

Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 18 inches (450 mm).

3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation.

4. Hinged sub-base to provide access to damper or as cleanout for grease applications.

5. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

6. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.


2.3 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF UPBLAST OR SIDEWALL

A. Configuration: Centrifugal roof upblast ventilator.





B. Housing: Removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings;

minimum ABMA9, L(10) of 100,000 hours.

4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.

5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch

adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed

pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp.

6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to

less than 50 percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

6. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction.


8. Wall Mount Adapter: Attach wall-mounted fan to wall.

9. Restaurant Kitchen Exhaust: UL 762 listed for grease-laden air exhaust.

F. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-)

thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer.

Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange .

2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."





1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal.

C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to

AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified

Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan

efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to

AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.


1. Install power ventilators on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in.

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. See Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."





3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."


A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to

NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background

and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."




C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.


1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.





5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if

they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans.



AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3600-1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units. 2. Casing liner.


A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for air terminal units.


B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 2. Include design calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


a. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. b. Instructions for adjusting software set points.



1.7 COMMISSIONING

A. An independent third party Commissioning Agent will document completion of the building HVAC Systems. Refer to section 019113 Building Systems Commissioning for the project Commissioning requirements and roles and responsibilities of each member of the Commissioning team.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

2.2 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:



1. Price Industries, Inc. 2. Nailor Industries 3. Titus 4. Krueger

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel, single wall. 1. 3/4 inch thick polyurethane foam adhesive complying with UL 181 erosion requirements

in accordance with ASHRAE Std 62.1, and having a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 for both insulation and adhesive, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Liner not to contain pentabrominated diphenyl ether (CAS #32534-81-9) or octabrominated diphenyl ether.

3. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 4. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size. 5. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from zero to 140 deg F (minus 18 to plus 60 deg C), shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.

E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg (750-Pa) inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

F. Hydronic Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain valve.

G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware. 1. SCR controlled. 2. Access door interlocked disconnect switch. 3. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air

temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable). 4. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements. 5. Airflow switch for proof of airflow. 6. Fan interlock contacts. 7. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A). 8. Mercury contactors.



9. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays. 10. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

H. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls system specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

1. Electric Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered open, spring return. 2. Electric Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with clock display, temperature

display in Fahrenheit and Celsius, and space temperature set point. 3. Electronic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and

maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg (1000 Pa); and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

4. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume (VAV) controller with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 230923

"Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

5. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.

I. Controls:

1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg (60- and 750-Pa) inlet static pressure.

2. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.

J. Control Sequences:

1. Occupied:

a. In a call for cooling, airflow will increase as the damper opens towards maximum setting to satisfy set point.

b. In a call for less cooling, airflow will decrease as the damper closes towards minimum setting to satisfy set point.

2. Unoccupied:

a. Damper closes to minimum maximum setting.

2.3 CASING LINER

A. 3/4 inch thick polyurethane foam adhesive complying with UL 181 erosion requirements in accordance with ASHRAE Std 62.1, and having a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a



maximum smoke developed index of 50 for both insulation and adhesive, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for

slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.



B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air terminal units.

D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.



C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.



3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.





AIR DIFFUSERS 23 3713-1

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Round ceiling diffusers.

2. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

3. Perforated diffusers.

4. Louver face diffusers.

5. Linear bar diffusers.

6. Linear slot diffusers.

7. Ceiling-integral continuous slot diffusers.

8. Light troffer diffusers.

9. Round induction underfloor air-distribution diffusers.

10. Linear underfloor air-distribution diffuser plenums.

11. High-capacity drum louver diffusers.

12. High-capacity, modular-core supply grille diffusers.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers.

2. Section 233713.23 "Air Registers and Grilles" for adjustable-bar register and grilles,

fixed-face registers and grilles, and linear bar grilles.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number,

size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Actual size of

smallest diffuser indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers with factory-applied color finishes. Actual size of

smallest diffuser indicated.





D. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected.

Actual size of smallest diffuser indicated.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,


5. Duct access panels.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS


following:

1. Krueger.

2. Nailor Industries Inc.

3. Price Industries.

4. Titus.

5. Tuttle & Bailey.

B. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

C. Material: Steel or Aluminum.

D. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

2.2 LOUVER FACE DIFFUSERS


following:

1. Krueger.



4. Titus.

5. Tuttle & Bailey.








2.3 LINEAR BAR DIFFUSERS


following:

1. Krueger.



4. Titus.

5. Tuttle & Bailey.




2.4 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS


following:

1. Krueger.



4. Titus.

5. Tuttle & Bailey.


C. Material - Shell: Steel or Aluminum, insulated.

D. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.

E. Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black.

F. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.

G. Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for

Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of

dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air

balancing.





REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 3713.23-1

SECTION 233713.23 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adjustable blade face registers and grilles.

2. Fixed face registers and grilles.

3. Linear bar grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to registers and grilles.

2. Section 233713.13 "Air Diffusers" for various types of air diffusers.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Smallest size

register and grille indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For registers and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

Smallest size register and grille indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For registers and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify

color selected. Smallest size register and grille indicated.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:





1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,


5. Duct access panels.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS

A. Adjustable Blade Face Register :


following:

a. Krueger.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Price Industries.

d. Titus.

e. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Steel or Aluminum.

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

B. Fixed Face Register <Insert drawing designation>:


following:

a. Krueger.



d. Titus.

e. Tuttle



2.2 GRILLES

A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille:


following:

a. Krueger.



d. Titus.

e. Tuttle







B. Fixed Face Grille:


following:

a. Krueger.



d. Titus.

e. Tuttle



C. Linear Bar Grilles


following:

a. Krueger.



d. Titus.

e. Tuttle



4. Distribution plenum.

a. Internal insulation.

b. Inlet damper.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of

Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and

accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements

for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations





where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in

the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify

Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before

starting air balancing.





CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216-1

SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired, fire-tube, water-tube condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for

generating hot water.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for boilers.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each boiler.

1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details signed and sealed by a qualified

professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor

bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for boiler, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.





1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate


3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.



D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

E. Product Certificates:

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic

testing of piping external to boiler.

2. CSA B51 pressure vessel Canadian Registration Number (CRN).


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period Boilers:

a. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Shock: 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion.

b. Heat-Exchanger Corrosion: Prorated for five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

1.7 COMMISSIONING

A. An independent third party Commissioning Agent will document completion of the building

HVAC Systems. Refer to section 019113 Building Systems Commissioning for the project

Commissioning requirements and roles and responsibilities of each member of the

Commissioning team.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and

Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B,

Appendix N.

E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795. Boilers shall be listed and labeled by

a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. CSA Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with CSA B51.

G. Mounting Base: For securing boiler to concrete base.

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler

pressure vessel, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to

withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

HVAC" when mounting base is anchored to building structure.

2.2 FORCED-DRAFT, FIRE-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS

A. Manufacturers

1. Cleaver-Brooks

2. Fulton

3. Buderus

4. Viessmann

5. Weil-McLain

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with heat

exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent;

combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and

controls. Water-heating service only.

C. Heat Exchanger: Nonferrous, corrosion-resistant combustion chamber.

D. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections.

E. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft.

F. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and

postpurge the combustion chamber.





1. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

G. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

H. Ignition: Spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision.

I. Casing:

1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.

2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.

3. Finish: Baked-enamel protective finish.

4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the

heat exchanger.

5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.

2.3 WATER-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS

A. Manufacturers

1. Cleaver-Brooks

2. Fulton

3. Buderus

4. Viessmann

5. Lochinvar

6. Weil-McLain

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, copper-finned, water-tube condensing

boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket;

flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain

connections; and controls. Water-heating service only.

C. Heat Exchanger: Finned-copper primary and stainless-steel secondary heat exchangers.

D. Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed.

E. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft drawing from gas premixing valve.

F. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and

postpurge the combustion chamber.

1. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.





G. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

H. Ignition: Silicone carbide hot-surface ignition that includes flame safety supervision and 100

percent main-valve shutoff.

I. Integral Circulator: Cast-iron body and stainless-steel impeller sized for minimum flow required

in heat exchanger.

J. Casing:

1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.

2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.

3. Finish: Textured epoxy.

4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the

heat exchanger.

5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.

2.4 TRIM

A. Include devices sized to comply with ASME B31.1.

B. Pressure Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.

C. Safety Relief Valve:

1. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

2. Description: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive

shutoff; factory set and sealed.

a. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads

complying with ASME B1.20.1.

D. Pressure Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) diameter. Gage shall have normal operating

pressure about 50 percent of full range.

E. Water Column: Minimum 12-inch (300-mm) glass gage with shutoff cocks.

F. Drain Valves: Minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) or nozzle size with hose-end connection.

G. Blowdown Valves: Factory-installed bottom and surface, slow-acting blowdown valves same

size as boiler nozzle. Blowdown valves shall be combination of slow and quick acting as

required by ASME B31.1.

H. Stop Valves: Boiler inlets and outlets, except safety relief valves or preheater inlet and outlet,

shall be equipped with stop valve in an accessible location as near as practical to boiler nozzle

and same size or larger than nozzle. Valves larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have rising stem.

I. Stop-Check Valves: Factory-installed, stop-check valve and stop valve at boiler outlet with free-

blow drain valve factory installed between the two valves and visible when operating stop-

check valve.





2.5 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and

Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

1. Control transformer.

2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.

3. Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner.

4. Low-Water Cutoff and Pump Control: Cycle feedwater pump(s) for makeup water

control.

5. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control

burner firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat

anticipator located in heated space.

a. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure

maximum system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal

runtime for boilers.

6. Sequence of Operation: Boiler shall operate at a minimum 90% efficiency under the

following conditions:

a. 25% to 50% firing rate with 122 deg F return water temperature

b. 75% firing rate with 100 deg F return water temperature

c. 100% firing rate with 93 deg F return water temperature

d. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure



7. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control

burner firing rate to maintain a constant steam pressure. Maintain pressure set point plus

or minus 10 percent.

a. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure



C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit

burner operation.

1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum

boiler design pressure.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Float and electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on

low water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type.

3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler

combustion-air inlet.

4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm

for above conditions.

D. Building Automation System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable

building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.





1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, low-water-level alarm.

b. Control: On/off operation, hot-water-supply temperature set-point adjustment.

2. A communication interface with building automation system shall enable building

automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an operator

workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler

control panel shall be available through building automation system.

2.6 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in

electrical Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,

transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power

connection to boiler.

1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match wiring diagram.

3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.

4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.

5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or

circuit breaker.

6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.

2.7 VENTING KITS

A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble,

indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.

B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet

air coupling, and sealant.


A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,

oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion

efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to 2010 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in

advance of testing.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping

and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices specified

in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13


B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Assemble and install boiler trim.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least

full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of

materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in

Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas-

train connection. Provide a reducer if required.





F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or

flange at each connection.

G. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply-, return-, and blowdown-boiler tappings with

shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

H. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

I. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.

J. Boiler Venting:

1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.

2. Connect full size to boiler connections.

K. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

L. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative:

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set

points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Boiler will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


F. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

G. Performance Tests:





1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and

equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing.

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field

performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply.

3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers.

a. Test for full capacity.

b. Test for boiler efficiency at low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40, and 20 percent

of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.

5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.

6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat

produced during tests if building systems are inadequate.

7. Notify Architect 24 hours minimum in advance of test dates.

8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



PACKAGED, LARGE-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 7416.13-1

SECTION 237416.13 - PACKAGED, LARGE-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, large-capacity, rooftop air conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components:

1. Casings. 2. Fans, drives, and motors. 3. Rotary heat exchanger. 4. Coils. 5. Refrigerant circuit components. 6. Air filtration. 7. Gas furnaces. 8. UV germicidal irradiation section. 9. Sound-attenuator section. 10. Dampers. 11. Electrical power connections. 12. Controls. 13. Roof curbs. 14. Accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, large-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.


A. Product Data: For each RTU.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

3. Include unit dimensions and weight. 4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 5. Fans:



a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Include fan construction and accessories. d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 7. Include filters with performance characteristics. 8. Include gas furnaces with performance characteristics. 9. Include factory selection calculations for each antimicrobial ultraviolet lamp installation. 10. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings: For each packaged, large-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting/attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

3. Wind and Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for RTUs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




4. Restraint of internal components.



D. Product Certificates: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.



F. System startup reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Filters: One set(s) of filters for each unit. 2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door. 3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven fan.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of outdoor, semi-custom, air-handling unit that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five

years from date of Substantial Completion

1.9 COMMISSIONING




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of RTUs and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE 15 Compliance: For refrigeration system safety.

E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

G. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design mounting and restraints for RTUs, including comprehensive engineering analysis.

1. Design RTU supports to comply with seismic performance requirements.

H. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified" and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier

B. Daikin

C. York International Corporation/Johnson Controls Inc

D. Trane, a brand of Ingersoll Rand

2.3 PACKAGED FACTORY ASSEMBLED UNITS

A. General:



1. Provide and install packaged rooftop unit(s) including fans, compressors, coils, piping, electrical and DDC controls. Each system shall be factory assembled, piped, internally wired, and fully charged with refrigerant and ready to operate. The systems shall heat, cool, dehumidify and be of the constant volume or variable air volume type as so specified or scheduled on the plans. The units shall be constructed for outdoor installation and configured as shown on the plans.

2. Factory packaged applied rooftop air conditioning system shall be the size indicated and shall contain the components indicated on drawings and described herein. Performance characteristics of all components are the minimum that will be acceptable.

3. Units must be shipped in single piece or major assembled sections to facilitate ease of rigging and installation. Rigging and joining of sections shall be done at the job site. Field built units and their components will not be accepted. All units shall be inspected and tested at the manufacturer's plant before shipment is made to the jobsite.

B. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 23 sections.

C. Capacity, size, static pressure, coils, filters, accessories, limiting velocities, arrangement, etc., as shown on Drawings and referred to in appropriate Division 23 Sections.

D. Each section of the system shall be factory tested (refrigeration, air handling, and controls) prior to shipment. Units shall ship from the factory fully complete and run tested as a complete unit.

E. Units shall bear UL, CSA, or ETL labels.

2.4 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge (1.3 mm) thick with manufacturer's standard finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

2. Inside Casing Wall: G90 (Z275)-coated galvanized steel 3. Floor Plate: G90 (Z275) galvanized steel, treadplate, minimum 18 gauge (1.3 mm)

thick. 4. Casing Insulation:

a. Materials: Injected polyurethane foam insulation. b. Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum R-4. c. Insulation Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). d. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in

casing walls, floors, or roof of unit.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.



D. Static-Pressure Classifications:

1. For Unit Sections Upstream of Fans: Minus 2-inch wg (500 Pa). 2. For Unit Sections Downstream and Including Fans: 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

E. Panels and Doors:

1. Panels:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness as casing.

b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. d. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components. Dimensions to be at least 24 inches (600 mm) wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 72 inches (1800 mm).

2. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components. Dimensions to be at least 24 inches (600 mm wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 72 inches (1800 mm.

3. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors. b. Access Section: Doors. c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels. d. Damper Section: Doors. e. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels large enough to allow periodic

removal and installation of filters. f. Mixing Section: Doors.

4. Service Light: 100-W vaporproof fixture with switched junction box located inside adjacent to door.

a. Locations: Each section accessed with door.

F. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Location: Each type of cooling coil. 2. Construction:

a. Single-wall, stainless steel sheet. b. Double-wall, stainless steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam

insulation and moisture-tight seal.

3. Drain Connection:



a. Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

b. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1 (DN 25). 4. Slope: Minimum 0.125-in./ft. (10-mm/mm) slope, to comply with ASHRAE 62.1, in at

least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

5. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face for distance to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

6. Width: Entire width of water producing device. 7. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep.

8. Pan-Top Surface Coating for Galvanized-Steel Drain Pans: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

9. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.

2.5 FANS, DRIVES, AND MOTORS

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Supply-Air Fans: Centrifugal forward curve dwdi, airfoil dwdi or plenum type as required to meet the airflow, static pressure and sound requirements, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized or painted steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft. 1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:

a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to flange and backplate; steel or aluminum hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

5. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation and seismic control. Factory-mount fans with manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).

6. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing. 7. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches (89 mm)

wide, attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide by 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.



a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Drives, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Drives, Belt: Factory-mounted, V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the factory.

2. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 3/4-inch (20-mm) diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

E. Condenser-Coil Fan: Variable-speed propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated ECM motors.

F. Relief-Air Fan: Propeller or centrifugal with motorized damper, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

G. Motors: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."


3. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

2.6 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Casing:

1. Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum with manufacturer's standard factory finish. 2. Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent at 1.6-

inch wg and 0.20 percent at 4-inch wg (0.5 percent at 400-Pa and 0.20 percent at 1000-Pa) differential pressure.

3. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section. 4. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings.

Mount horizontal rotors on tapered roller bearing.

B. Rotor - Aluminum or Polymer: Segmented wheel, strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic, noncorrosive, silica-gel desiccant coating.

C. Rotor - Aluminum, Metallic, or Polymer: Aluminum, metallic, or polymer segmented wheel, strengthened with radial spokes impregnated with nonmigrating, water-selective, 3-angstrom molecular-sieve desiccant coating.



D. Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed by variable-frequency controller. Permanently lubricated wheel bearings with an L-10 400,000 hours.

E. Controls:

1. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring. 2. Retain one of first three subparagraphs below. 3. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, permitting input of field

connected 4- to 20-mA or 1- to 10-V control signal. 4. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust-air sensor to

vary rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing. 5. Variable-frequency controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust- and outdoor-air

sensors, automatic changeover thermostat and set-point adjuster, to vary rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing and air differential temperature above set point. Provide maximum rotor speed when exhaust-air temperature is less than outdoor-air temperature.

6. Control energy recovery to permit air economizer operation.

a. Bypass dampers to assist energy recovery control.

7. Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed. 8. Speed Settings: Adjustable settings for maximum and minimum rotor speed limits. 9. Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent at 1.6-

inch wg and 0.20 percent at 4-inch wg (0.05 percent at 400-Pa and 0.20 percent at 1000-Pa) differential pressure.

2.7 COILS

A. General Requirements for Coils:

1. Comply with AHRI 410. 2. Fabricate coils section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Tubes: Copper. 2. Fins:

a. Material: Aluminum. b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 12 fins per inch (mm).

3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond. 4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections. 5. Frames: Stainless steel. 6. Coatings: None. 7. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig (2070 kPa).



C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:





D. Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil:





8. Suction-discharge bypass valve.

2.8 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, variable speed scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.



9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Hot-gas reheat solenoid valve modulating with a replaceable magnetic coil. 11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. 12. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion

valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.

2.9 AIR FILTRATION

A. Panel Filters:

1. Description: Flat Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported, disposable air filters with holding frames.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. 3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive

and antimicrobial coating. 4. Filter-Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on

outlet side.

B. Bag Filter:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting filters with holding frames in steel, basket-type retainers.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. 3. Media: Fibrous material, with antimicrobial coating, constructed so individual pockets

are maintained in tapered form by flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.

4. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.

C. Adhesive, Sustainability Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. 1. Adhesive, LEED for Schools Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and

that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.10 GAS FURNACES

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 and NFPA 54.

B. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

C. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Rated Minimum Turndown Ratio: 30 to 1. 2. Fuel: Natural gas. 3. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor. 4. Gas Control Valve: Modulating.



5. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

D. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

E. Venting, Gravity: Gravity vented with vertical extension.

F. Venting, Power: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve with vertical extension.

G. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in parallel-blade arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. (20 L/s per sq. m) at 1-inch wg (250 Pa) and 8 cfm/sq. ft. (40 L/s per sq. m) at 4-inch wg (1.0 MPa) rated in accordance with AMCA 500D.

B. Barometric relief dampers.

C. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. 3. Operator Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:



a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0.

7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators. 10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 V dc. 11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 V ac or 8 W at 24 V dc. 12. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 13. Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F (5 to 40 deg C). 14. Run Time: 30 seconds.

2.12 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.13 CONTROLS

A. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Fan-speed switch. d. Manual changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Exposed set point. g. Exposed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature and humidity set points, occupied

and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature and humidity, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.



3. Wall-mounted humidistat or sensor with the following features:

a. Exposed set point. b. Exposed indication.

4. Unit-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit:

a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure.

b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system.

c. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.

B. DDC Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg F (54 deg C) enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

c. Supply and return smoke detectors hard wired to associated fan with dry contacts for fire alarm connection.

d. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).

e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day clock with a minimum of two programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:

a. Heating Setback: Plus 10 deg F (Minus 11 deg C). b. Cooling Setback: System off. c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot-gas bypass to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure.



b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature.

c. Switch reversing valve for heating or cooling mode on air-to-air heat pump.

7. Hot-Gas Reheat-Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Humidistat opens hot-gas valve to provide hot-gas reheat, and cycles compressor.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Reheat not required.

8. Gas Furnace Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Modulate burner to maintain discharge temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.

9. Provide outside air airflow measuring stations:

a. Provide OA airflow station and control of the OA airflow rate through the RTU controller to maintain minimum outside airflow setpoint.

10. Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Morning warm up cycles. b. 0 to 100 percent of the fan capacity. Controller shall permit air-side economizer

operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F (15 deg C). Use outdoor-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. Start relief-air fan with end switch on outdoor-air damper. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling.

c. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper. d. Outdoor-Airflow Monitor: Accuracy maximum plus or minus 5 percent within 15

and 100 percent of total outdoor air. Monitor microprocessor shall adjust for temperature, and output shall range from 2- to 10-V dc.

11. Carbon Dioxide Sensor Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Reset minimum outdoor-air ratio down to minimum 10 percent to maintain maximum 1000-ppm concentration.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.

12. Terminal-Unit Relays:

a. Provide heating- and cooling-mode changeover relays compatible with terminal control system required in Section 233600 "Air Terminal Units" and Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

C. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic

code storage. 3. Provide BACnet or LonWorks compatible interface for central HVAC control

workstation for the following:



a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air

temperature and humidity. d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable-frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring economizer cycles. i. Monitoring air-distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume.

2.14 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for wind-load requirements.

C. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches (355 mm).

2.15 ACCESSORIES

A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F (10 deg C) temperature in gas burner compartment.



B. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.

C. Low-ambient kit using variable-speed condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F (1.7 deg C).

D. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.

E. Remote potentiometer to adjust minimum economizer damper position.

F. Return-air bypass damper.

G. Factory- or field-installed demand-controlled ventilation.

H. Safeties:

1. Smoke detector. 2. Condensate overflow switch. 3. Phase-loss protection. 4. High and low pressure control. 5. Gas furnace airflow-proving switch.

I. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

J. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

K. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser box with mounting flanges, and interior transition.

L. Vertical vent extensions to increase the separation between the outdoor-air intake and the flue-gas outlet.

M. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.

N. Outdoor air intake weather hood with moisture eliminator.

O. Service Lights and Switch: Factory installed in fan and coil sections and each accessible section with weatherproof cover. Factory wire lights to a single-point field connection.

2.16 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.



2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).


A. AHRI Compliance:

1. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.

B. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311.

2. Damper leakage tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs with actual equipment provided. 1. Install normal-weight, 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix

inside roof curb, 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified with concrete.



B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13




B. Where installing piping adjacent to RTU, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to unit mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32), ASTM B88, Type M (ASTM B88M, Type C) copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or roof drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.

3.4 DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Connect electrical wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

3. Locate nameplate where easily visible.



B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.



19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner

for peak efficiency.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen

concentration. f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing

rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F (8 deg C) above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. e. Relief-air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms.



29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.9 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTUs and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean RTUs internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.





D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

E. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.



SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONES 23 8126-1

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.



B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit. 2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.



B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carrier Corporation

B. Trane Inc

C. York International Corporation/Johnson Controls

D. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc

E. Daikin

F. LG Electronics USA, Inc

2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS)

A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-

expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. 4. Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than

0.1 inch (2.5 mm); leak tested to 300 psig (2070 kPa) underwater; with a two-position control valve.

5. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

6. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.

7. Fan Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

9. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 10. Condensate Drain Pans:



a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep.

b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet. c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1 (DN 25).

d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate

from top coil.

B. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 4. Fan Motors:



c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for

electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. f. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on interior of unit.


6. Condensate Drain Pans:



2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) deep.






d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

7. Air Filtration Section:

a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access

doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

b. Disposable Panel Filters:

1) Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3) MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2: 5. 4) Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 5) Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on

inlet side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.

2.3 INDOOR UNITS (6 TONS (21 kW) OR MORE)

A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-

expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. 4. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to

motor. 5. Fan Motors:



c. Three-phase, permanently lubricated, ball-bearing motors with built-in thermal-overload protection.

d. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.




7. Filters: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, in fiberboard frames 8. Condensate Drain Pans:



2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep.




d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate

from top coil.

2.4 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS)

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch. c. Refrigerant: R-410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid

subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to -10 deg F (-23 deg C). 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.



2.5 OUTDOOR UNITS (6 TONS (21 kW) OR MORE)

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch. c. Refrigerant: R-410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid

subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F (7 deg C). 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

C. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.

D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

F. Drain Hose: For condensate.

G. Monitoring:



1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation. 3. Monitor economizer cycle. 4. Monitor cooling load. 5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting

base. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13


E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Connect hydronic piping to supply and return coil connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

2. Remote, Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Connect hydronic piping to supply and return connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.



C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.





D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.4 STARTUP SERVICE



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.



FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 23 8236-1

SECTION 238236 - FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydronic, baseboard and finned-tube radiation heaters.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures. 4. Indicate location and size of each field connection. 5. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties. 6. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls. 7. Include enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories. 8. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For finned-tube radiation heaters with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Color Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:



1. Structural members, including wall construction, to which finned-tube radiation heaters will be attached.

2. Method of attaching finned-tube radiation heaters to building structure. 3. Penetrations of fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOT-WATER BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Vulcan 2. Sterling

B. Performance Ratings: Rate baseboard radiation heaters according to Hydronics Institute's "I=B=R Testing and Rating Standard for Baseboard Radiation."

C. Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins resting on polypropylene element glides. One end of tube shall be belled.

D. Enclosures: Minimum 0.0329-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick steel, removable front cover.

1. Full-height back. 2. Full-length damper. 3. End panel. 4. End caps. 5. Inside and outside corners. 6. Valve access door. 7. Joiner pieces to snap together. 8. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. 9. Element Brackets: Primed and painted steel to support front panel and element.

2.2 HOT-WATER FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Vulcan 2. Sterling

B. Performance Ratings: Rate finned-tube radiation heaters according to Hydronics Institute's "I=B=R Testing and Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation."

C. Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins resting on element supports. One end of tube shall be belled.

D. Element Supports: Ball-bearing cradle type to permit longitudinal movement on enclosure brackets.

E. Front Panel: Minimum 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick steel.



F. Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Conceal insulated piping at maximum 36-inch (914-mm) spacing. Pedestal-mounted back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel. Provide stainless-steel escutcheon for floor openings at pedestals.

G. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch (914-mm) spacing to support front panel and element.

H. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

I. Damper: Knob-operated internal damper at enclosure outlet.

J. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches (150 by 175 mm), integral with enclosure.

K. Enclosure Style: Flat top.

1. Front Inlet Grille: Punched louver; painted to match enclosure. 2. Front Inlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Mill-finish aluminum. b. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

colors. c. Painted to match enclosure.

3. Top Outlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Mill-finish aluminum. b. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

colors. c. Painted to match enclosure.

L. Accessories: Filler sections, corners, relay sections, and splice plates all matching the enclosure and grille finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive finned-tube radiation heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations before installation of finned-tube radiation heaters.


3.2 BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION




B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.

C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.

D. Install access doors for access to valves.

E. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.

F. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls.

G. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

H. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

I. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

3.3 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION


B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.

C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.

D. Install access doors for access to valves.

E. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.

F. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls.

G. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

H. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

I. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect hot-water finned-tube radiation heaters and components to piping according to Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

1. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.

C. Install control valves as required by Section 230923.11 "Control Valves."



D. Install piping adjacent to finned-tube radiation heaters to allow service and maintenance.

E. Ground electric finned-tube radiation heaters according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

F. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:


2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




CABINET UNIT HEATERS 23 8239.13-1

SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water and electric-resistance heating coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


3. Include location and size of each field connection. 4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories. 6. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties. 7. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls. 8. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.



D. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater indicated with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which cabinet unit heaters will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 COMMISSIONING




1. Cabinet Unit-Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Hot Water

a. Airtherm; a Mestek Company b. Dunham-Bush, Inc. c. Engineered Air Ltd. d. International Environmental Corporation e. Vulcan Radiator f. Rittling

2. Electric Units

a. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company b. Indeeco c. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products d. Rittling

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 2021.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.4 COIL SECTION INSULATION

A. Insulation Materials: ASTM C1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall have aluminum-foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F (0.037 W/m x K at

24 deg C) mean temperature. 3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed

index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E84. 4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.




B. Insulation Materials: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C534, Type II, except for density.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F (0.034 W/m x K at

24 deg C) mean temperature. 3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed

index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C411. 4. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A

or NFPA 90B. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.5 CABINETS

A. Material: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect.

1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0677-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick galvanized sheet steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam fasteners.

2. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick galvanized sheet steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.

3. Recessed Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet. 4. Control Access Door: Key operated. 5. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 6 inches

(150 mm) high with leveling bolts. 6. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide piping end pocket. 7. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick steel, finished to match cabinet.

2.6 FILTERS

A. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value and Average Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.2.

B. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: According to ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Material: Washable Foam, MERV 3

2.7 COILS

A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain.



B. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

2.8 CONTROLS

A. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal, directly connected to motor; thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

B. Factory, Hot-Water Piping Package: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B) copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

1. Two-way, two-position control valve.

2. Two-Piece, Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

3. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venture, connection for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.

4. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body, 300-psig (2068-kPa) working pressure at 250 deg F (121 deg C), with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow within plus or minus 10 percent of differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig (13.8 to 552 kPa).

5. Y-Pattern, Hot-Water Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A126, Class B); 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded pipe and full-port ball valve in strainer drain connection.

6. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

C. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control voltage transformer. 2. Unit-mounted thermostat with the following features:

a. Heat-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Manual fan-speed switch. d. Adjustable deadband. e. Exposed set point.



f. Exposed indication. g. Deg F (Deg C) indication.

3. Unit-mounted temperature sensor. 4. Unoccupied period override push button. 5. Data entry and access port.

a. Input data includes room temperature and occupied and unoccupied periods. b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature, entering-water

temperature, operating mode, and status.

D. DDC Terminal Controller:

1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day.

2. Unoccupied Period Override: Two hours. 3. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operations:

a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain setback room temperature.

4. Heating-Coil Operations:

a. Occupied Periods: Open control valve (Energize electric-resistance coil) to provide heating if room temperature falls below thermostat set point.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve (energize electric-resistance coil) if room temperature falls below setback temperature.

5. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.

E. Interface with DDC System for HVAC Requirements:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at central workstation. 3. Interface shall be BAC-net or LonWorks compatible for central DDC system for HVAC

workstation and include the following functions:

a. Adjust set points. b. Cabinet unit-heater start, stop, and operating status. c. Data inquiry, including supply-air and room-air temperature. d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.

F. Electrical Connection: Factory-wired motors and controls for a single field connection.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

D. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping," Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose.

D. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of cabinet unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

F. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



G. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.



GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 26 0500-1

SECTION 26 05 00 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Applicable provisions of Division 0 and Division 1 shall govern Work under this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED IN THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACT

A. The mention of any Article, operation or method requires that the Contractor shall provide same and perform each operation in complete accordance with the conditions stated. The Contractor shall provide all material, labor, equipment and transportation as necessary to complete the project in compliance with the Contract Documents. In general, this work includes everything essential for a complete electrical system in operating order as shown on the drawings and indicated in the specifications.

B. All work shall be installed in accordance with all State and Local Inspection Authorities

having jurisdiction together with the recommendations of the manufacturer whose equipment is to be supplied and installed under this Contract.

C. Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall examine the drawings relating to their work

and shall become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building.

D. The Contractor, in conjunction with the Architect's representative, shall establish exact

locations of all materials and equipment to be installed. Consideration shall be given to construction features, equipment of other trades and requirements of the equipment proper.

E. All materials shall be suitably stored and protected prior to installation and all work shall

be protected after installation, during construction and prior to acceptance.

F. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery, erection and installation of all equipment and apparatus required to be installed by the Contractor. All such equipment shall be removed by the Contractor upon completion of the project.

G. Refer to General Requirement for temporary electrical service.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The Owner. The individual who the Owner selects as the project representative.

B. This Contractor. The Electrical Contractor, also referred to as "The Contractor".

C. Provide. Furnish, install and wire complete and ready for service.

D. Exposed. Exposed to view in any room, corridor or stairway.

E. Code. National, State and Local Electrical codes including OSHA requirements.



F. Equals. Manufacturers or methods listed by name in the specifications, on the drawings or in an addendum are considered to be equals.

G. Substitution. Any manufacturer or method other than those listed by name in these

specifications, on the drawings, or in an addendum.

H. Signal Voltage. NEC class 1, 2, or 3 remote control, signaling, or power limited circuits.

I. Low Voltage. 50 to 600 volts.

J. Medium Voltage. 601 to 35,000 volts.

K. High Voltage. 35,001 volts and greater.

L. Electrical Ductbank. Assembly consisting of electrical conduits encased in concrete. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. A/E: Architect and/or Engineer B. ENGR: Engineer C. CEC: Chicago Electrical Code D. NEC: National Electrical Code E. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association F. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association G. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration H. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories

1.5 PERMITS AND LICENSES

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all applications and working drawings, as

required, to authorities having jurisdiction over the project. All licenses and permits required shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor.

1.6 STANDARDS AND CODES

A. All work shall be installed in accordance with National, State, and Local codes,

ordinances, laws, and regulations. Comply with all applicable OSHA regulations.

B. All materials shall have a UL or ETL label where a UL or ETL Standard and/or test exist. 1.7 DIMENSIONS AND DEFINITE LOCATIONS

A. The drawings depicting electric work are diagrammatic and show, in their approximate

location, symbols representing electrical equipment and devices. The exact location of such equipment and devices shall be established in the field in accordance with instructions from the Architect and/or as established by manufacturer's installation drawings and details.

B. The Contractor shall refer to shop drawings and submittal drawings for all equipment

requiring electrical connections to verify rough-in and connection locations.

C. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, no measurement of an electric drawing derived by scaling shall be used as a dimension to work by. Dimensions noted on the electric



drawings are subject to measurements of adjacent and previously completed work. All measurements shall be performed prior to the actual installation of equipment.

1.8 DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall keep a detailed up-to-date record, of the manner and location in

which all installations are actually made, indexing each feeder, pull box and protective device. Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall modify the project electronic drawings in AutoCAD and Revit MEP, and specification files to incorporate this information. Modified documents shall be turned over to the Owner in both electronic and hard paper copy formats. Record drawings shall also include:

1. Locations of all buried conduit or similar items. Include buried depth.

2. Field changes of dimension or detail.

3. Changes made by field order or change order.

4. Details not on original contract drawings.

5. Changes to circuit numbers.

6. Junction box locations and conduit runs, with trade sizes indicated, for all

lighting, power, and electrical systems installed.

7. As Built Drawings - See General Requirements - Division 1.

B. In the event of a conflict between the drawings and specifications, this Contractor shall base their bid on the greater quantity, cost or quality of the item in question, unless such conflict is resolved by an addendum.

1.9 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment required shall be new.

B. All equipment supplied shall be based on materials and equipment of manufacturers

specified. No substitutions will be allowed except as permitted in this specification.

C. All items specified shall be the latest type or model produced by the manufacturer specified. If descriptive specification or model number is obsolete, substitute the current product.

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions shall not be allowed. In any case where the Contractor wishes to use

equipment or methods other than those listed by name, that equipment must be approved by the Engineer. To gain approval for equipment not listed, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for his review.

1. Documentation from the equipment manufacturer indicating where this equipment

meets and does not meet the specifications or drawings as written. This documentation shall state all exceptions taken to the specification and the reasons for such exceptions. All documentation relative to the request shall be submitted on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by a representative of the manufacturer.



2. Manufacturer's Cut Sheets: Provide manufacturers cut sheets with complete model

number in PDF format for review.

3. Lighting Fixtures: Request for substitutions shall include photometric test reports performed by an independent testing laboratory.

4. The Contractor shall provide samples of the proposed equipment for the Engineer's review, if requested by the Engineer.

5. The Contractor shall furnish any other information or materials as requested by the

Architect/Engineer to establish equality.

B. The Contractor shall acknowledge that they have reviewed the submission criteria for the request by stamping the submission with a review stamp or acknowledgement by an accompanying letter.

C. Equipment and materials submitted for review without proper documentation will be

rejected without review.

D. Any submittal, including samples, shall be received in the Engineer's office 5 days prior to bidding. Equipment will only be approved “as equal” if there is adequate time to issue an addendum to notify all bidders of the approval.

E. Materials, equipment, or methods of installation other than those named, will be accepted

only if such articles are in accordance with the general requirements and are similar in composition, dimension, construction, capacity, finish and performance.

F. Contractors submitting equipment for approval as an equal, shall include in their bids all

incidental costs that may result from the use of approved equipment. Such costs shall include, but not be limited to, additional costs that may be incurred by other contractors whose scope of work is affected by use of the “equal” product. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for those costs even if they do not become evident until after bidding.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT BROCHURES

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in advance of construction and installation so as to not

cause delay in another Contractor's work.

B. All data submitted for Engineer's review shall be numbered consecutively, shall be noted to correlate with the electrical drawings and shall bear: 1. The name and location of the project.

2. The name of the Contractor.

3. The date of submittal.

4. The date of the drawings and the date of each correction and revision.

C. If more than one type of lighting fixture (or other material) is on a submitted PDF, the

proposed equipment shall be conspicuously highlighted or noted by the Electrical Contractor.



D. Shop drawings for different systems and equipment shall be combined into a separate PDF by specification section and not by manufacturer. Submittals which contain different specification section systems combined into one PDF will be returned for resubmittal.

E. Lighting Fixture shop drawings shall consist of a single submittal with all project light

fixtures included. Submittals grouped by manufacturer shall not be accepted. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating drawings from his various suppliers in order to comply with this requirement.

F. The Contractor shall approve shop drawings and equipment brochures prior to submission.

The Contractor shall verify that the materials and equipment depicted will properly fit into the construction. The Contractor shall also review all previously completed work related to the installation of the equipment depicted to ensure that it has been properly installed.

G. Materials or equipment subject to prior review by the Engineer shall not be fabricated or

installed by the Contractor, without approval. The Engineer's review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the drawings and specifications, unless prior approval for such deviations has been granted.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall assemble and submit to the Architect for subsequent submission to the Owner, three complete sets of a Manual of Operation and Maintenance for each of the electrical and communications systems.

B. Each manual shall consist of a loose-leaf bound volume instructing the Owner's personnel

in the use, operation and maintenance of the system in question. The manual shall cover all phases of operation of the equipment and shall be illustrated with photographs, drawings, wiring diagrams, etc. Manuals shall accurately describe the operation, construction and adjustable features of the complete system and its component parts. The manual shall be complete with an equipment parts listing to facilitate the ordering of spare and replacement parts.

C. The engineer will give consideration to maintenance manuals being provided on computer

compact discs with maintenance manual files stored in a PDF format. If this is desired, the contractor shall provide a written request prior to submitting the manuals indicating which equipment manuals they propose to provide in this format.

D. Each manual shall contain two sets of final shop drawings depicting equipment as installed.

1.13 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. All rubbish resulting from this work shall be removed and disposed of on a daily basis in such manner as to be acceptable to the Architect.

B. The Contractor shall clean all exposed iron work, the interior and exterior of cabinets and

pull boxes, etc., and remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the work.

C. Where painted surfaces of equipment have been damaged or rusted during construction, the Contractor shall paint same to match final.

D. Clean other equipment as indicated in other sections of the specification for specific

equipment. 1.14 TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE



A. The operation of the equipment and electrical systems does not constitute an acceptance of the work by the Owner. The final acceptance is to be made after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment and demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the drawings and the specifications.

B. After the work is completed and prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall conduct the

following tests, tabulate data, date, sign and submit to the Engineer: 1. Standard megger insulation test on each feeder.

2. Ground resistance test.

3. Clamp ammeter test on each feeder conductor with all utilization equipment energized.

The load current in each phase conductor of the feeder or the portion thereof supplying the panel shall not differ from the average connected load currents in the feeder conductors by more than 7½%. If the load current does differ by more than 7½%, the Contractor shall change phase loading to same or receive written approval from the Engineer that this is not required due to the nature of the load.

C. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish certificates of approval

from all authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall demonstrate that all work is complete and in perfect operating condition, with race way and conduit system properly grounded, all wiring free from grounds, shorts, and that the entire installation is free from any physical defects.

D. In the presence of the Engineer and the Owner, the Contractor shall demonstrate the proper

operation of all miscellaneous systems.

E. Perform other test as specifically directed in other sections of the specification for specific equipment.

1.15 GUARANTEE

A. See General Conditions. 1.16 ACCESS PANELS

A. All access panels required by code or otherwise to electrical service equipment shall be supplied and installed by Electrical Contractor.

1.17 SPARE PARTS

A. Requirements for spare parts are outlines in individual specification sections. Spare parts shall be turned over, unopened, to the Owner as part of the maintenance manual submittal.

1.18 PREBID SURVEY

A. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall tour the job site to review the following: 1. The exact configuration of areas requiring demolition, temporary power, relocating, etc.

2. Site conditions such as material storage, staging areas, parking, etc.

3. Problems with work sequence.

B. Any conditions found that are not shown on the documents but that may affect the scope of

the work shall be reported to the Engineer. 1.19 COMMISSIONING



A. An independent third-party Commissioning Agent will document completion of the building Electrical Systems. Refer to Section 019113 “Building Systems Commissioning” for the project Commissioning requirements and roles and responsibilities of each member of the Commissioning Team.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 7 for fire stopping requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE STOPPING

A. Refer to division 7 for fire stopping requirements.

B. Openings in fire rated construction and annular spaces around conduits, cable trays, and

other penetrating items shall be protected in accordance with NEC article 300-21. The fire rating of the protective seal shall be at least that of the floor or wall into which it is installed, so that the original fire rating of the construction is maintained.

C. All wall or floor penetrations openings shall be as small as possible.

D. All openings and annular spaces required by code to be protected shall be protected whether

specifically indicated on the plans or not.

E. Installation of materials and assemblies shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 SLEEVES

A. Where conduits, cables trays, or other electrical raceways must pass through floors or walls

that are to be constructed of poured in place concrete, the contractor shall provide sleeves in the formwork prior to the concrete pour. For low voltage systems Hilt speed sleeves shall be provided. It shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to provide all sleeves for his work unless specifically indicated otherwise on the plans. Prior to installing the sleeves, the contractor shall prepare drawings indicating the locations, quantities, sizes, and spacings of all sleeves anticipated. The drawings shall be forwarded to the structural engineer for approval.

B. Floor sleeves shall extend a minimum of 2 inches above the finished floor.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00


GENERAL ELECTRIC PROVISIONS 26 0519-1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and

data circuits.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS


1.5


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product

by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN- 2

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.




B. Comply with NFPA 70.

Cook County Health Issued for Bid / Permit Hanson Park Health Center 04/29/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A. B.

CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

3.3

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."



3.4 A.

CONNECTIONS

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.5

IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7

FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.


7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.




B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.


B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

8. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise


indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


D. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:


1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.



A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.


F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for


EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849 3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting", Section 099123

"Interior Painting", and Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

2. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Southwire Company. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined



in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 3. Hubbell Incorporated. 4. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 5. RACO; Hubbell. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb

(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.



F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Subject to Physical Damage: GRC. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this



type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect

for each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.



L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll

cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds



100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with



requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Instruction signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.



D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label

laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

2.5 A.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.



2.6

MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Power.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange.



3) Phase C: Yellow.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,

manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide

self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor designation.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label



c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. d. Enclosed switches. e. Enclosed circuit breakers. f. Enclosed controllers. g. Contactors.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

26 0573 - 1

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report.


A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.



26 0573 - 2


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companies offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.



26 0573 - 3

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy

formats, showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection

type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length.



26 0573 - 4

f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective

devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus. 2. Medium-voltage controller. 3. Motor-control center. 4. Distribution panelboard. 5. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.



26 0573 - 5

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 141 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40. d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium- voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.



26 0573 - 6

2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit currents.

3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 141 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,

whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-

pickup values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching



26 0573 - 7

schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 0923-1

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application. 2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off

levels within that range 3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Square D. 9. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


intended location and application. 2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied,

and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.



6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

D. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and

ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS


by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Square D. 9. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at

277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.

2. Sensing Technology: PIR.



3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off." 4. Voltage: 120 V and low voltage with associated power pack for277 V; passive-infrared. 5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150

fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 15 minutes. 7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. 2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.



2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and



1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry

has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set

time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's

operations. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements

for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION 26 09 23


NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943-1

SECTION 26 09 43 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The lighting control system specified in this section shall provide time-based, sensor-

based (both occupancy and daylight), and manual lighting control.

B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if lighting load is capable of being dimmed).

C. All system devices shall be networked together enabling digital communication and shall

be individually addressable.

D. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to function in some default capacity even if network connectivity to the greater system is lost.

E. The system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.

F. The system shall not require any centrally hardwired switching equipment.

G. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section 019113 “Building Systems Commissioning” for Contractor’s

responsibilities in the commissioning process.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in National Electrical Code for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

B. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data,

metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

C. PC: Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."

D. Power Line Carrier: Use of radio-frequency energy to transmit information over transmission lines whose primary purpose is the transmission of power.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for

specific application on this Project.

1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and access requirements.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.

C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with

data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


E. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming

of digital and analog devices.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible

components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control functions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or



replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship or from transient voltage surges within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of software input/output to execute switching or dimming commands. b. Failure of lighting control devices and software. c. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Extended Warranty Period Failure Due to Transient Voltage Surges: Eight years. 4. Extended Warranty Period for Electrically Held Relays: 10 years from date

of Substantial Completion.

1.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program

software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revise licenses for use of the software.

1. Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to

allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment, if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Sensor Switch nLight.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Network Lighting Controls and associated devices shall be plenum rated and suitable for use

within air handling spaces.

B. Performance Requirements: Manual switches, an internal timing and control unit, and external sensors or other control signal sources send a signal to a PC-based programmable-system control module that processes the signal according to its programming and routes an open or close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits, or routes variable commands to one or more dimmers, for groups of lighting fixtures or other loads.

2.3 CONTROL MODULE

A. Module shall be a wall mounted user accessible device that is capable of communicating and

controlling downstream system control devices and linking into an Ethernet.



B. Devices shall be powered by low voltage, fit within a two gang switch box (or mounting ring), and have a backlit LCD panel.

C. Device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices (bridges) or directly to a lighting control zones device.

D. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it.

E. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.

F. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection.

G. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 400 devices to the

management software.

H. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned IP address.

I. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number: nGWY

2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS

A. Networked System Occupancy Sensors:

1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the lights.

2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially turn lights on from an off state; thus preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional “dual” technology shall be used.

4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be acceptable.

5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

6. Sensors shall be available with zero, one, or two integrated Class 1 switching relays, and up to one 0-10 VDC dimming output. Sensors shall be capable of switching 120 / 277 / 347 VAC. Load ratings shall be 800 W @ 120 VAC, 1200 W @ 277 VAC, 1500 W @ 347 VAC, and ¼ HP motor. Relays shall be dry contacts.

7. Sensors shall be available with one or two occupancy “poles”, each of which provides a programmable time delay.

8. Sensors shall be available in multiple lens options which are customized for specific applications.

9. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.



10. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 11. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication

(via CAT-5 connections) and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue.

12. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button.

13. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling.

14. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements.

B. Networked System Daylight (Dimming) Sensors:

1. Dimming sensor’s set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through the

sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming” procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered.

2. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or lamp outages).

3. Dimming sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements. (Note: This function should be performed prior to any dimming of the lamps including the “auto set- point” setting).

C. Networked System Power (Relay) Packs:

1. Power Pack shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays and contribute low voltage power

to the rest of the system. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay(s), shall have an

optional 2nd relay, 0-10 VDC dimming output, or line voltage dimming output, but shall not be required to contribute system power. Power Supplies shall provide system power only, but are not required to switch line voltage circuit. Auxiliary Relay Packs shall switch low voltage circuits only.

2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC and provide Class 2 power to the system. 3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports. 4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the

software and locally via the device push-button. 5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded ½ inch chase

nipple. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safety requirement.

6. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electrical enclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES

A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time or scheduled

via lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a collection of devices function for a defined time period.

B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device, zone



of devices, or customized group of zones.

C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore information regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control profiles.

D. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be configurable

via a lighting control profile.

E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on the software’s host server.

F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the following

calendar options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and sunrise/sunset +/- timed offsets.

G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an

astronomical clock.

H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired.

I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence settings: daily, weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly, and yearly.

J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles.

2.6 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and configurable remotely from the software.

B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, current Microphonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).

C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software:

model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent network device.

D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.

E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.

F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.

G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.

H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be

encrypted.



I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and installation via the internet.

J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network).

2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG,

complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14

AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors,

complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5 for horizontal copper cable and with Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways. Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (13 mm).

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-

limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A

locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.

E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.

G. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing.



B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module “gateway” features are operational.

3.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of

software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software.

3.4 A.

START-UP & SUPPORT FEATURES

To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically be grouped together into a functional lighting control zone.

B. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequate power is applied and before any system software is installed.

C. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without requiring any commissioning.

D. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.

E. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely and without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a laterdate.

F. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink its LED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.

3.5

ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls and software training for PC-based control systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate



C. Source quality-control test reports.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.


Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

F. Comply with latest CFR for energy efficiency.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer

provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following: 1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Aluminum.

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

E. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below

normal full capacity.

F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of

115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

I. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

2.4

IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.5

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.


C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding

and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's

written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of

transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.


F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



PANELBOARDS 26 2416-1

SECTION 262416 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:


devices. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE


1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.




A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption

of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. 3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating



with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device



requires mechanical release for removal. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES




B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip). 5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip). 6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position. d. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.



2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have

been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or

space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.



C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING



A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions. END OF SECTION 262416


WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking

wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Hospital-grade receptacles. 3. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 4. Snap switches.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

1.4

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.



1.6 A.


Field quality-control reports.

1.7

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 8301 (single), 8300H (duplex).

2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-



plated, brass mounting strap.

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H.

2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; VGFH20. b. Hubbell; HFR8300HL. c. Leviton; 7899-HG. d. Pass & Seymour; 2095HG.

C. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd.


a. Cooper; 8300BLS. b. Hubbell; HBL8362SA. c. Leviton; 8380. d. Pass & Seymour; 8300BLSP.

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.


4. Comply with NFPA 70. 2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.



B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Single Pole: • Cooper; AH1221. • Hubbell; HBL1221. 4) Leviton; 1221-2. • Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. b. Two Pole: • Cooper; AH1222. • Hubbell; HBL1222. 9) Leviton; 1222-2. • Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2. c. Three Way: • Cooper; AH1223. • Hubbell; HBL1223. • Leviton; 1223-2. • Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3. d. Four Way: • Cooper; AH1224. • Hubbell; HBL1224. • Leviton; 1224-2. • Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off." 2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic 3. Material for Unfinished SpacesSmooth, high-impact thermoplastic 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.



2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated

or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.



5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.



2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




FUSES 26 2813-1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge Fuses. 2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


FUSES 26 2813-2


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses. 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size

and with system short-circuit current levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-

coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically

damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes


FUSES 26 2813-3

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Feeders: Class J, time delay. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. 3. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s). 3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-1

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches

2. Non-fusible switches

3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

4. Enclosures.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.



D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground



conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.




1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate



compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 3323.11 - 1

SECTION 263323.11 – CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following central battery and power conversion equipment rated 600 V and less for emergency lighting:

1. Interruptible (slow-transfer) central battery equipment. 2. Interruptible (fast-transfer) central battery equipment. 3. Uninterruptible (UPS-type) central battery equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. IBC: International Building Code.

C. Interruptible: As used in the Section Text, an off-line, passive-standby or line-interactive, inverter-only unit, with an intentional interruption of power to the load until an internal transfer switch picks up and transfers the load to the unit's inverter and internal battery source on loss of the "normal" source, and then retransfers to the "normal" source when it is restored. Transfer time can be "slow" (up to approximately 1 second) or "fast" (2-4 ms or 40-50 ms, depending on manufacturer).

D. LED: Light-emitting diode.

E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

F. NiCd: Nickel cadmium.

G. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

H. PC: Personal computer.

I. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

J. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion (also listed as "THD" in catalog data by manufacturers).

K. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.



L. Uninterruptible: As used in the Section Text, an on-line, double-conversion (rectifier/inverter) unit, with no interruption of power to the load on interruption and restoration of the "normal" source.

M. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

N. VRLA: Valve-regulated lead acid.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of central battery equipment unit.

1. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, shipping splits, and furnished options, specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and rating of central battery equipment unit.


clearances, ventilation requirements, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include system one-line diagram, internal and interconnecting wiring; and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Include elevation, details, and legends of control and indication displays. 5. Include -circuit current (withstand) rating of unit.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around central battery equipment. Show central battery equipment layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of central battery equipment.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For central battery equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing central battery equipment. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. c. Manufacturer's written instructions for selecting and setting field-adjustable controls

and status and alarm points


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than 5 of each type. 2. Output Circuit Breakers: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than 5 of

each type. 3. Output Circuit Breaker Open/Tripped Alarm Contacts: One for every 10 supplied, but no

fewer than 5 of each type. 4. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set. 5. Circuit Board: One spare circuit board for each critical circuit.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles.

B. Store equipment in spaces having environments controlled within manufacturers' written instructions for ambient temperature and humidity conditions for non-operating equipment.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F.



3. Humidity: More than 95 percent condensing. 4. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet .

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for central battery equipment, including clearances between central battery equipment and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace central battery equipment that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special warranty, applying to batteries only, applies to materials only, on a prorated basis, for period specified.

1. Warranty Period: Include the following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Central Battery Equipment (excluding Batteries): Two years.

b. Premium VRLA Batteries:

1) Full Warranty: One year. 2) Pro Rata: 19 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE (UPS-TYPE) CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT


1. Chloride Systems. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Dual-Lite. 4. Emergi-Lite; a Thomas & Betts brand. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Central Battery Equipment:


2. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label central battery equipment to comply with UL 924 and UL 1778.

3. Comply with the IBC, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. 4. Comply with NEMA PE 1.



C. Performance Requirements for UPS-Type Central Battery Equipment:

1. Type: On-line, double conversion. 2. Continuously provide uninterrupted ac power to connected emergency electrical lighting

system. 3. Automatic Operation:

a. Normal Conditions: Supply the load with ac power flowing from normal ac power input terminals, through rectifier and inverter, with battery connected in parallel with rectifier output.

b. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal ac supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, battery supplies constant, regulated, inverter ac power output to the load without switching or disturbance.

c. If normal power fails, battery continues to supply regulated ac power through the inverter to the load without switching or disturbance.

d. When power is restored at normal supply terminals of system, controls automatically synchronize inverter with the external source before transferring the load. Rectifier then supplies power to the load through the inverter and simultaneously recharges battery.

e. If battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, rectifier charges battery. When battery is fully charged, rectifier automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

f. If any element in the rectifier/inverter string fails and power is available at normal supply terminals of system, static transfer switch transfers the load to normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption of supply.

g. If a fault occurs in system supplied by the inverter output, and current flows in excess of the overload rating of the inverter, static transfer switch operates to bypass fault current to normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.

h. When fault has cleared, static transfer switch returns the load to inverter output. i. If battery is disconnected, inverter continues to supply power to the load with no

degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of output bus.

4. Manual Operation:

a. Turning inverter off causes static transfer switch to transfer the load directly to normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

b. Turning inverter on causes static transfer switch to transfer the load to inverter.

5. Maximum Acoustical Noise: xx dB, "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under any condition of normal operation, measured 39 inches from nearest surface of component enclosure.

D. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of central battery equipment input voltage rating.

2. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of central battery equipment frequency rating.

3. Synchronizing Slew Rate: 1 Hz per second, maximum. 4. Minimum Off-Line Efficiency: 99percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or operating

condition.



6. Ambient Temperature Rating (Other Than Batteries): Not less than 68 deg F and not exceeding 86 deg F.

7. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Other Than Batteries): Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 158 deg F

8. Ambient Temperature Rating (Batteries): Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F

9. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Batteries): Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F

10. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 11. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet 12. Off-Line Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of

1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.

E. Inverter and Controls Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits; provides complete self-diagnostics, periodic automatic testing and reporting; with alarms.

F. Controls and Indication:

1. Status Indication: Door-mounted, labeled LED indicators or digital screen displaying the following conditions:

a. Normal power available. b. Status of system. c. Battery charging status. d. On battery power. e. System fault. f. External fault.

2. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

a. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include the following:

1) Keys for METER, CONTROL, PROGRAM, and CLEAR modes. 2) Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through

identification and password with at least two levels of access: View only; and view, operate, and service.

3) Control Authority: Supports at least three conditions: Off, local manual control at unit and local automatic control at unit.

b. Digital Display: Plain-English language messages on a digital display; provide the following historical logging information and displays:

1) Real-time clock with current time and date. 2) Tests and Events Logs: Record and store up to 50 tests and events:

a) Dates. b) Times. c) Durations. d) Output voltage and currents.



3) Alarm Logs: Record and store up to 50 alarms:

a) Dates. b) Times. c) Alarm type.

4) Metering Functions: Display central battery equipment metering parameters including, but not limited to, the following:

a) Input and output voltage (V ac) and output current (A ac). b) Battery voltage (V dc) and current (A ac). c) Fault or alarming status (code). d) Power output (VA). e) Inverter load (W). f) Ambient temperature (deg F). g) System run time (cumulative days). h) Inverter run time (cumulative minutes).

5) Alarm Functions: Digital display mounted flush in unit door and connected to display central battery equipment parameters including, but not limited to, the following:

a) High/low battery charge voltage. b) High/low input voltage. c) Battery nearing low-voltage condition. d) Battery low voltage. e) High ambient temperature. f) Inverter fault. g) Output fault. h) Output overload.

3. Remote Signal Interfaces:

a. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of one programmable (Form C) dry-circuit relay output(s) (120-V ac, 2 A) for remote indication of the following:

1) Fault or status indication. 2) On bypass. 3) Low battery.

b. Communications Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable a owner IP monitoring and display status and alarms and to program central battery equipment].

1) Communications Ports: RS-232. 2) Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-232. 3) Compliance with ASHRAE 135: Controllers shall support serial MS/TP and

Ethernet IP communications, and shall be able to communicate directly via DDC system for HVAC RS-485 serial networks and Ethernet 10Base-T networks as a native device.

G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:



1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide protection against damage from supply voltage surges as defined in IEEE C62.45, Category B and C.

2. Integral, programmable, self-diagnostic and self-test circuitry; with alarms and logging. 3. Battery deep-discharge and self-discharge protection; with alarms. 4. Battery self-test circuitry; with alarms and logging.

H. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, complying with UL 489.

1. Integrated Equipment Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65kA.

I. Rectifier:

1. Description: Solid state, with the following operational features:

a. Automatically convert incoming ac voltage to regulated dc bus voltage, with less than 2 percent rms ripple voltage with inverter fully loaded and batteries disconnected.

b. Rectified Efficiency: Not less than 97 percent.

J. Inverter:

1. Description: Solid-state, high-frequency, PWM type, with the following operational features:

a. Automatically regulate output voltage to within plus or minus 3 percent, for all load ranges and for maximum 25 percent step-load changes; regulation may increase to 8 percent for 100 percent step-load changes, with recovery within 3 cycles.

b. Automatically regulate output frequency to within plus or minus 0.05 Hz, from no load to full load, at unity power factor, over the operating range of battery voltage.

c. Inverter Overload Capability: 115 percent for 10 minutes; 150 percent surge for 10 seconds.

d. Brownout Protection: Produces rated power without draining batteries when input voltage is down to 75 percent of normal.

e. Load Power Factor: 0.5 lead to 0.5 lag.

K. Battery Charger:

1. Description: Solid state, variable rate, temperature compensated; automatically maintains batteries in fully charged condition when normal power is available.

2. Maximum Battery Recharge Time from Fully Discharged State: 24 hours. 3. Low-voltage disconnect circuit reduces battery discharge during extended power outages,

monitors battery voltage, and disconnects inverter when battery voltage drops to no less than 85.7 percent of nominal voltage.

L. Batteries:

1. Description: Premium VRLA batteries.

a. Capable of sustaining full-capacity output of inverter unit for minimum of 90 minutes.

2. Battery Disconnect and OCPD: Manufacturer's standard.



M. Maintenance Bypass Systems:

1. Maintenance Bypass Mode: Internal; manual operation only; bypasses central battery equipment power circuits (inverter and static transfer switch); requires local operator selection at central battery equipment. Transfer and retransfer shall be make-before-break, without disrupting power to the load or causing system instabilities.

2. Bypass Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current.

N. Integral Output Disconnecting Means and OCPD:

1. Single-Output OCPD: As scheduled on Drawings; manufacturer's standard ratings based on unit output ratings.

2. Multiple-Output OCPDs: Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers, complying with UL 489; voltage rating matching unit output voltage rating; 20 A, single pole.

a. Normally Closed: 2with trip alarm. b. Normally Open: 2 with trip alarm.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Central Battery Equipment Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1 steel cabinets with access to components through hinged doors with flush tumbler lock and latch.

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish over corrosion-resistant prime treatment.

2.3 OPTIONAL AND ACCESSORY FEATURES

A. Factory-Installed Options and Accessories:

1. Multiple-Output Voltages: Supply unit branch circuits at different voltage levels if required. Transform voltages internally as required to produce indicated output voltages.

2. Split-Output Configuration: Divides output into normally on and normally off buses. 3. Auto-dialer. 4. Audible alarm with silencer switch. 5. Remote Summary Alarm Panel: Labeled LEDs on panel faceplate shall indicate five basic

status conditions. Audible signal indicates alarm conditions; silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication.

a. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.

b. Maximum Distance from Main Unit: 1000 feet

6. Remote Meter Panel: Match equipment requirements of remote monitoring, controlling, and programming of central battery equipment.

a. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.



b. Maximum Distance from Main Unit: 150 feet


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate central battery equipment fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

B. Testing: Test and inspect central battery equipment according to UL 924.

C. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled central battery equipment, by a qualified testing agency, according to UL 924. Affix standards organization's label. Include the following:

1. Functional test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

2. Full-load test. 3. Transient-load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test.

D. Central battery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store central battery equipment according to NECA 411.

B. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive central battery equipment, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, structural support, ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before installation begins.

C. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

D. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of central battery equipment with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install central battery equipment and accessories according to NECA 411.

C. Floor-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Install central battery equipment on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.




D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

G. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

H. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.


1. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes and bonding connections to metallic piping systems as indicated; comply with NFPA 70.

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between central battery equipment and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify central battery equipment, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label central battery equipment with engraved nameplates. 3. Label each separate cabinet, for multicabinet units. 4. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for central battery equipment, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of central battery equipment units.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



1. Inspect and Test Each Component:

a. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and adjust components and equipment.

b. Test insulation resistance for all external branch circuit, feeder, control, and alarm wiring connected to central battery equipment element and component.

c. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Inspect central battery equipment, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust components and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for all external branch circuit, feeder, control, and alarm wiring connected to central battery equipment element and component.




4. Verify that input voltages and frequencies at central battery equipment locations are within voltage and frequency limits specified in Part 2. If outside this range, notify Owner before closing input OCPDs.

5. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in manufacturer's written instructions and in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification, including specifically those for batteries, battery chargers, and UPS, regardless of the type of central battery equipment provided. Certify compliance with test parameters.

6. Perform a load-duration test at rated voltage and rated output current to verify the correct functional operation of the unit under full-load stable operating conditions for the minimum time limits required by UL 924. Monitor and record ambient temperature and temperatures within the unit.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of central battery equipment. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of central battery equipment 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Central battery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies central battery equipment and describes all test results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.


3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, and other adjustable parts.

C. Adjust the trip settings of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous-trip elements; install fuses if not factory installed.



D. Set the automatic system test parameters.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace central battery equipment whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central battery equipment, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based control, monitoring, and display functions.



SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and

control equipment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 262416 "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-

voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.

1.5



Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849 B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7

WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.



D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSOR

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT). 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. Emerson Electric Co. 4. GE Zenith Controls. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. PowerLogics, Inc. 7. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 8. Siemens Industry, Inc.

B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449,Type 1.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Integral disconnect switch. b. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components. c. Indicator light display for protection status.


D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase


shall not be less than 200 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA

G. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS



1. ABB France. 2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT). 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. Emerson Electric Co. 5. GE Zenith Controls. 6. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 7. PowerLogics, Inc. 8. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 9. Siemens Industry, Inc.

B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components.

3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of protection status


D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V

E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849 2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14

AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight

as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs


installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.



INTERIOR LIGHTING WITH LED 26 5100-1

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit an electronic copy of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11,

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. 1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated on

the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details, include information on housing and optics system. c. Physical dimensions and description. d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.



e. Installation details. f. Energy efficiency data. g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES

Lighting Measurements testing and calculation guides. h. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES

L70 rated life.

2. Manuals: a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and

operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.

3. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.

a. Certification by the Contractor that the interior lighting systems have been

properly installed and tested. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION



A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, as shown on drawings, and as specified.

B. Sheet Metal:

1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed.

2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges, and shall accommodate

internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.

3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame, and lens frame shall be free of light leaks.

4. Hinged door frames shall operate smoothly without binding. Latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.

C. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall

be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, aircraft cable, captive hinges, or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

D. Metal Finishes: 1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion-

resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication.

2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances,

except where otherwise shown on the drawing.



3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.

E. Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

2.2 LED EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA and UL.

B. Housing and door shall be thermoplastic.

C. For general purpose exit light fixtures, door frame shall be hinged, with latch. For vandal-

resistant exit light fixtures, door frame shall be secured with tamper-resistant screws.

D. Finish shall be white.

E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.

F. Fixtures: 1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090 inch)

thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass.

2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on

drawings.

3. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.

F. Voltage: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V). 2.3 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General: 1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the

drawings, and as specified.

2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.

3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated: a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load. b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.) c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz. d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95. f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%. g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements. b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified



in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE. c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70. d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

B. LED Downlights:

1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

C. LED Troffers: 1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable

from below the ceiling.

2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer. 2.2 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.. Fixtures shall also be Chicago-approved.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and

angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires

for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.



When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension

devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


B. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

A. Perform the following: 1. Visual Inspection:

a. Verify proper operation by operating the lighting controls. b. Visually inspect for damage to fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers. Clean

fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers that have accumulated dust, dirt, or fingerprints during construction.

2. Electrical tests:

a. Exercise dimming components of the lighting fixtures over full range of dimming capability by operating the control devices(s) in the presence of the owner. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range, and replace defective components at no cost to the owner.

3.5 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATION

A. Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in

service that the lighting systems are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.



LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 26 5613 - 1

SECTION 265613 – LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Poles and accessories for support of luminaires. 2. Luminaire-lowering devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPA: Equivalent projected area.

B. Luminaire: Complete luminaire.

C. Pole: Luminaire-supporting structure, including tower used for large-area illumination.

D. Standard: See "Pole."


A. Product Data: For each pole, accessory, and luminaire-supporting and -lowering device, arranged as indicated.

1. Include data on construction details, profiles, EPA, cable entrances, materials, dimensions, weight, rated design load, and ultimate strength of individual components.

2. Include finishes for lighting poles and luminaire-supporting devices. 3. Anchor bolts. 4. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings:



3. Detail fabrication and assembly of poles and pole accessories.



4. Foundation construction details, including material descriptions, dimensions, anchor bolts, support devices, and calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of installation.

5. Anchor bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 6. Method and procedure of pole installation. Include manufacturer's written installations.

C. Samples: For each exposed lighting pole, standard, and luminaire-supporting device and for each color and texture specified.


A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements according to AASHTO LTS-6-M and that load imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.



E. Sample Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty.

F. Soil test reports


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For poles and luminaire-lowering devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include pole inspection and repair procedures.


A. Pole repair materials.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for foundation testing.


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B660.



B. Store poles on decay-resistant skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of pole(s) and luminaire-lowering device(s) that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within a specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs from special warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Corrosion Resistance: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design pole foundation and pole power system.

B. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-6-M.

C. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.

D. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf distributed according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.

E. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M for applicable areas on the Ice Load Map.

F. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 50 feet (15 m) in height is 100 mph (45 m/s).

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years. c. Velocity Conversion Factor: 1.0.



2. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet (15 m) high or less is 100 mph (45 m/s).

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years. c. Velocity Conversion Factor: 1.0.

G. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual EPA of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the EPA to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

H. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL POLES

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American LitePole. 2. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. 3. Hubbell Incorporated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain poles from single manufacturer or producer.

C. Source Limitations: For poles, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of pole from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

D. Poles: Comply with ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Square, tapered. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

E. Poles: Comply with ASTM A666, stainless steel with a minimum yield of 55,000 psig (379 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Square, tapered. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

F. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as plate.

G. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adaptor fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole-mounted adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.



2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. Match pole material and finish.

H. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

I. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, size and type as determined by manufacturer. Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Compatible with poles and standards as well as the substrates to which poles and standards are fastened and shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

J. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size indicated, and accessible through handhole.

K. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads.

1. For climbing positions, install at 15-inch (381-mm) vertical spacing, alternating on opposite sides of pole, oriented 180 degrees from each other; first step shall be at an elevation 10 feet (3 m) above finished grade.

2. For working positions, install steps on opposite side of pole, oriented 180 degrees from each other at the same elevation.

L. Handhole: Oval shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm), with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

M. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weatherproof, 3-by-5-inch (76-by-130-mm) handhole located at midpoint of pole, with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.

N. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported load multiplied by a 5.0 safety factor.

O. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel, with finish matching that of pole.

P. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

Q. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize according to ASTM A123/A123M.

R. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a



smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

S. Powder-Coat Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair powder coat bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Powder Coat: Comply with AAMA 2604.

a. Electrostatic-applied powder coating; single application and cured to a minimum 2.5- to 3.5-mils (64- to 89-um) dry film thickness. Coat interior and exterior of pole for equal corrosion protection.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 MOUNTING HARDWARE

A. Anchor Bolts: Manufactured to ASTM F1554, Grade 55, with a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi (380 000 kPa).

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C. 2. Headed rods. 3. Threading: Uniform National Coarse, Class 2A.

B. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A, Heavy-Hex.

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C. 2. Four nuts provided per anchor bolt, shipped with nuts pre-assembled to the anchor bolts.

C. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1.

1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C, Class 50]. 2. Two washer(s) provided per anchor bolt.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine poles, luminaire-mounting devices, lowering devices, and pole accessories before installation. Components that are scratched, dented, marred, wet, moisture damaged, or visibly damaged are considered defective.

C. Examine roughing-in for foundation and conduit to verify actual locations of installation.


3.2 POLE FOUNDATION

A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Pre-Cast Foundations: Factory fabricated, with structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

1. Baseplate: Stamped with manufacturer's name, date of production, and cable entry.

D. Direct-Buried Foundations: Install to depth indicated on Drawings, but not less than as indicated. Add backfill in 6-inch (150-mm) to 9-inch (230-mm) layers, tamping each layer before adding the next or as shown on Drawings. To ensure a plumb installation, continuously check pole orientation with plumb bob while tamping.



E. Direct-Buried Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than as indicated. To ensure a plumb installation, continuously check pole orientation with plumb bob while tamping.

1. Make holes 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter larger than pole diameter. 2. Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive

strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) at 28 days and finish in a dome above finished grade. 3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. 4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.

F. Anchor Bolts: Install plumb using manufacturer-supplied steel template, uniformly spaced.

3.3 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on drawing.

1. Fire Hydrants and Water Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm). 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communications, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet (3 m). 3. Trees: 15 feet (5 m) from tree trunk.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level according to pole manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2 -inch (13-mm) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete-Paved Areas: Install poles with a minimum 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of the adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel. Insert material to a level 1 inch (25 mm) below top of concrete slab.

F. Raise and set pole using web fabric slings (not chain or cable) at locations indicated by manufacturer.



3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50-percent overlap.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.

B. Ground Nonmetallic Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundation.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Inspect poles for nicks, mars, dents, scratches, and other damage. 2. System function tests.



LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

SECTION 265619 – LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology.

2. Luminaire supports. 3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

3. Section 265613 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support exterior lighting equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.




A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire. 4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project.

a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring. 7. Photoelectric relays. 8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required



C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture indicated with factory-applied finish.

D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For luminaire supports.

1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Luminaires. 2. Structural members to which equipment and luminaires will be attached.



3. Underground utilities and structures. 4. Existing underground utilities and structures. 5. Above-grade utilities and structures. 6. Existing above-grade utilities and structures. 7. Building features. 8. Vertical and horizontal information.

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire. 2. Photoelectric relay.

D. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.


F. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and photoelectric relays to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes.



1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers' laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products and complying with applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

E. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

F. Mockups: For exterior luminaires, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract


4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipping.


A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire installation.

B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components. b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.



c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Comply with IESNA TM-15-07 Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit replacement of drivers without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Optical assemblies: full cutoff with zero uplight, “dark sky” compliant. LED assemblies shall comply with IESNA BUG rating system.

K. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 90 percent.



3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

L. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Finish: premium 5 stage TGIC polyester powder coat paint minimum 2.5 mils thick, applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaires before shipping. Where indicated, match the finish process and color of pole or support materials.

a. Color: See Luminaire Schedule.

N. Outdoor Wall Mounted Area Luminaires

1. Shall have minimum 52 lumens per watt. 2. No more than 48% of the total luminaire output shall be within the forward 60-80º zone. 3. No more than 3% of the total luminaire output shall be in the forward 80-90º zone. 4. No light at or above horizontal 90-180º zone.

O. Canopy Luminaires

1. Shall have minimum 70 lumens per watt. 2. At least 30% of total luminaire output shall be within the 40-60º zone. 3. No more than 20% of total luminaire output shall be above the 80º zone.

2.3 LED DRIVERS AND ARRAYS

A. UL 1598 listing.

B. LED arrays shall have LED’s that produce minimum 80 lumens/watt @ 525mA.

1. Lumen Depreciation Data: maintain greater than 95% lumen maintenance at 60,000 hours per IES TM-21.

2. LED color: neutral white, 4000 deg K, minimum CRI of 70.

C. LED arrays shall have an IP66 enclosure rating.

D. Driver Life Rating not less than 100,000 hours.

E. Power supply / driver shall be field replaceable by means quick-disconnect connectors and easy access mounting hardware.

F. Drives shall accept 120 through 480 volts, 50/60 Hz.

G. Power Factor > 0.9@ full load.



H. THD < 20% @ full load.

I. Surge protection: 10kA/10kV per ANSI/IEEE C136.2-2014

J. The housing shall have an integral thermal management system with extruded aluminum radiation fins and lateral airways.

K. Minimum starting temperature: minus 30 deg C, 40 deg C ambient.

L. Comply with IES LM-79-08 and LM-90-08 Approved Methods.

M. Comply with In-Situ testing for more reliable results.

N. LED’s shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) compliant.

2.4 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

1. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.



D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Concrete Sections.

2.6 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6 with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Refer to Luminaire Schedule or shall match existing site poles. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation.

B. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

D. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, and then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 2. Finish: Match pole and luminaire material and finish.

E. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by “AA", comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Finish: Premium five (5) stage TGIC polyester powder coat paint.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range or to match existing adjacent poles.

2.7 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

B. Fusing: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by driver manufacturer. Fuseholders shall be completely waterproof and shall grip the fuse in the load side section when opened. The circuit shall be fused in the base of the pole and accessible through the handhole.



C. Banner Arms: Coordinate with manufacturer for maximum banner size limitations to avoid banner arm or pole failure. Banner arms shall be break-away type designed to fail before over stressing the pole.

D. Wind Mitigation Devices: Provide in areas of consistent, high, uneven winds.

E. Duplex Receptacle: Where noted, provide a NEMA 5-20R Duplex Receptacle in a weatherproof assembly complying with Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI) type.

1. Recessed, nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use, cover, color to match pole, with cord opening, that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.

2. Where noted, provide minimum 1800-W transformer, 120V secondary, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.

2.8 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, roofs, and canopy ceilings for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.





B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

E. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to a minimum 1/8 inch backing plate attached to wall structural members.

G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

3.4 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION:

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

1. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.



B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.6 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):

a. IES LM-5. b. IES LM-50. c. IES LM-52. d. IES LM-64. e. IES LM-72.

2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.



3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train]Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and photocell relays.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 27 0200-1

27 02 00 General Requirements (Structured Cabling Systems and Pathways and Spaces systems for all Voice and Data systems)

27 02 01 Summary

A. The Scope of Work covered by this document is to furnish and install the Structured Cabling Systems and Pathways and Spaces systems. This work will provide for the structured cabling system (SCS) for all Voice and Data systems. Work on this project will commence after the award of the bid to a successful bidder.

B. Telecommunications system shall include the following systems:

1. Structured Cabling System (SCS) For Telecommunications Systems

2. Pathways for Telecommunications Systems

3. Grounding and Bonding System (GBS) For Telecommunications Systems

4. Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems

27 02 05 Additional Requirements

A. Integration: Responsibility for overall telecommunications system integration and coordination of work among trades, subcontractors, and suppliers shall rest with Contractor named in construction contract issued by Owner’s Representative. Work covered by this division of specifications shall be coordinated with related work indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere under project specifications. Work related to telecommunications system shall be performed under direct supervision of telecommunications system installer in a manner approved by product manufacturer.

B. Coordination of work: Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of work among project specification divisions and contractor/subcontractors involved in this project. This coordination of Work Includes following instructions provided the Construction Manager or General Contractor if project is managed by such.

C. General compliance requirements: Provide a complete and operable system in compliance with project drawings, specifications, referenced standards, applicable building codes, and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requirements. Scope of this contract includes planning, design, materials, equipment, labor, configuration, programming, testing, startup and commissioning services, and documentation costs for complete and operable system that meets all requirements indicated on drawings or contained in specifications. Comply with all contract documents, specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s instructions, and Owner and AHJ requirements. In case of conflict among applicable documents or standards, contractor shall notify owner’s representative in writing of apparent conflict, and then comply with



most stringent requirements unless otherwise directed in writing from owner’s representative. Work Includes all items required for complete system whether or not identified in specification or drawings.

D. Information about general construction and architectural features and finishes shall be derived from structural and architectural drawings and specifications only.

E. Items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents shall be provided in quantities necessary to complete work.

F. Work related to telecommunications system shall be installed by an SCS manufacturers authorized or certified trained installer and supervised an SCS manufacturers authorized or certified SCS Engineer. Owner reserves the right to review and approves any personnel assigned to this project in a supervisory or managerial role.

G. SCS contractor shall have had at least 10 years of comparable experience with telecommunications projects. As part of the proposal, SCS installer shall submit at least three (3) comparable Project reference descriptions with reference contacts. Comparable projects shall equal or exceed size and complexity of work on drawings.

H. Complete and usable work: Refer to and comply with requirements in this section.

27 02 10 Related Documents and Drawings

A. General: The project drawings and general conditions of Contract shall apply to this section.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with work specified in other sections and divisions of specifications.

C. Reference: Codes and standards as referenced in this section may define additional specifications or requirements not specifically called out within this division. However, contractor shall adhere to most stringent requirements as defined herein, or as defined by reference within this section.

D. Architectural and Engineering specifications may have additional conditions or requirements that affect the work defined by this division of specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all conditions and other trade requirements that may impact schedule, scope of work, work progress, or other factors that may affect the overall ability for contractor to execute the requirements of this division of specifications.

27 02 20 Codes and Standards

A. General: All work, including but not limited to: cabling, pathways, support structures, wiring, equipment, installation and workmanship shall comply with the latest editions of the requirements of the Authority Having



Jurisdiction (AHJ), National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, all applicable local rules and regulations, equipment manufacturer's instructions, and the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard of Installation. In case of discrepancy or disagreement between the documents noted above, the Contractor shall satisfy the most stringent requirements.

B. Other sections of this document contain References to Codes and Standards that are applicable to the section.

27 02 20.20 Codes

A. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

ANSI/ICEA S-80-576-2002, Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair Indoor Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems

ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2002, Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductor

ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair Indoor Cable for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems

ICEA S-102-700-2004, ICEA Standard for Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted- Pair Indoor Cables for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems Technical Requirements, 2004

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, National Electrical Code® (NEC®)

NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces,

NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code®

NFPA 75, Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment

NFPA 76, Recommended Practice for the Fire Protection of Telecommunications

Facilities NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems

NFPA 101, Life Safety Code®

NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces



NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

NFPA 5000™, Building Construction and Safety Code

27 02 20.40 Reference Standards

A. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)

B. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Telecommunications Systems

ANSI X3T9.5, Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps

ANSI/TIA-526.7-A, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant

ANSI/TIA-568.0-D, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

ANSI/TIA-568.1-D, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

ANSI/TIA-568-C, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

ANSI/TIA-568.3-D, Optical Fiber Cabling and Components Standard

ANSI/TIA-568-C.4, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard

ANSI/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

ANSI/TIA-606-C, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructures

ANSI/TIA-862-B, Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent Building Systems

ANSI/TIA 1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure

J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

T-526-14-C, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

TIA-598-D, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding

TIA-604.3-B, FOCIS 3—Fiber Optic Connector Intermateablility Standard, Type SC

TIA-604.10-B, FOCIS 10—Fiber Optic Connector Intermateablility Standard, Type LC

TIA TSB-125, Guidelines for Maintaining Optical Fiber Polarity Through Reverse-Pair Positioning

TIA-758-A, Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard



TSB-155-A, Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T

C. Other Reference Materials

ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2006, Standard, Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual (COOSP), current edition.

BICSI 13th Edition Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

BICSI 3rd Edition Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Reference Manual (ESSDRM), current edition

BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIM), current edition

BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM), current edition

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), current edition

BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM), current edition

FCC Rules and Regulations

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program

27 02 25 Abbreviations, Acronyms and Definitions

27 02 25.20 Abbreviations and Acronyms

ACD Automatic Call Distribution

AFF Above Finished Floor

AWG American Wire Gauge

BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International

CAT6A Category 6A Copper Cable

CDDI Copper Distributed Data Interface

CMP Communications Multipurpose Plenum: cable rating

CMR Communications Multipurpose Riser: cable rating EIA

Electronic Industries Association

ELFEXT Equal-Level Far-End Crosstalk



FEXT Far End Crosstalk

Gbps Gigabits per second

HSM High Speed Migration

HVAC Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame - Termination frames, relay racks, and cable management

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IM Information Management

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

LAN Local Area Network

Mbps Megabits per second

MDF Main Distribution Frame, consisting of carrier entrance rooms and head-end

MMF Multi-mode fiber optics, 50 or 62.5-micron laser optimized core

MUTOA Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly

NEXT Near End Cross Talk

NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

PBX- Private Branch Exchange: telephone switch

PDS Premises Distribution Systems (See SCS)

PoE Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

POP Point of Presence

PSACR Power Sum Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio

PSAFEXT Power Sum Alien Far-End Crosstalk

PSAELFEXT Power Sum Alien Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk

PSANEXT Power Sum Alien Near-End Crosstalk

PSELFEXT Power Sum Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk

PSNEXT Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk

SCC Security Command Center

SCS Structured Cabling System, or Structure Connectivity System; a complete cabling system

SFF Small Form Factor

SMF Single-mode fiber optics, 8.3-micron core



TC Telecommunications Closet

TE Telecommunications Enclosure

TEF Telecommunications Entrance Facility

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

TR Telecommunications Room

TO Telecommunications Outlet

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol

WAO Work Area Outlet

WAN Wide Area Network

27 02 25.40 Definitions Access Floor - A floor system that has removable floor panels.

Building Backbone Cabling – Cabling used to connect Floor Distributors (FD) or other local collection points to the Building Distributor (BD). Building backbone cabling typically carries aggregate traffic and, as such, impacts multiple network devices and users. Building backbone cabling may include either fiber optic or copper cabling or both.

Building Distributor (BD) – Termination point from which all building backbone cabling emanates and interconnection point for the network backbone. Commonly referred to as BDF in Americas, Main Comm Rooms in EMEA and Communication Room, IT Lab or IT Room in AsiaPac. Referred to as BD in international and European industry standards and Intermediate Cross-connect (IC) in American industry standards. There is one BD for each building and it feeds all FD’s in the same building. The BD should be located so that all FD’s served are within 300 cable meters (984 cable feet). All BD’s are linked to the

Campus Backbone Cabling – Cabling used to connect Building Distributors (BD) or other key network segments to the Campus Distributor (CD). With rare exceptions, campus backbone cabling carries aggregate traffic and typically impacts entire buildings worth of network devices and users and, as such, link redundancy with diverse routing is highly recommended. Campus backbone cabling almost exclusively consists of fiber optic cabling. Copper cabling may be used in short-distance (< 90m) applications. In such cases, lightning protection will usually be required by code.

Campus Distributor (CD) – Termination point from which all campus backbone cabling emanates and highest-level interconnection point for the network backbone. Commonly referred to as NOC in Americas and Main Comm Rooms



in EMEA. Referred to as CD in international and European industry standards and Main Cross-connect (MC) in American industry standards. On smaller campuses, there is one CD for the campus. On larger campuses, there might be several CD’s with each CD serving several buildings. Besides linking to each of the BD’s it serves, the CD is also the network interconnection point for data center links and links to service providers.

Category 6A (Cat 6) / Class EA– A category/class of transmission performance that specifies electrical properties up to 500 MHz and capable of supporting data applications operating at 10Gbps. Refer to the TIA-568-C family of standards for more information on Category 6 and ISO/IEC 11801 for more information on Class EA requirements.

Certification – The testing and documentation of the transmission performance (e.g., Category 5e / Class D) of a permanent link or channel, based on sweep frequency (where applicable) testing of numerous parameters with results compared to a range of acceptable values. This project requires 100% certification (with documentation) of all permanent link cabling at the time of installation. Channel certification is optional and is the responsibility of the group using the channel.

Channel – The entire physical pathway between active equipment ports, inclusive of all patch cords, patch panels, jacks and cabling segments.

Class C – A category of transmission performance, defined in ISO and EN standards, that specifies electrical properties up to 16 MHz

Conduit - A raceway of circular cross-section.

Entrance Facility (EF) – Termination point of service provider cables that have entered the building and location of service demarcation point (MPOE) and interconnection point to the network. Commonly referred to as Telco Room in Americas, POP Room in EMEA and Building Entrance in AsiaPac. Referred to as Building Entrance Facility in international and European industry standards and Entrance Facility (EF) in American industry standards. The EF is linked to the CD, where present, or to the BD.

Floor Distributor (FD) – Termination point for horizontal cabling and interconnection point for network access. Commonly referred to as IDF in Americas and AsiaPac and as Sub Comms Room in EMEA. Referred to as Floor Distributor (FD) in international and European industry standards and Horizontal Cross-connect (HC) - FD quantities and locations are determined by building size and geometry so that all points served are within 90 cable meters (295 cable feet) of an FD. The FD feeds all Telecommunications Outlets (TO’s) in its service zone. All FD’s in a building are linked to the building’s Building Distributor (BD) via backbone cabling.

Horizontal Cabling – Cabling used to connect individual work area outlets to local Floor Distributors (FD) or other collection points. Unlike backbone cabling,



horizontal cabling does not typically carry aggregate traffic and, as such, impacts only single network devices or users. In buildings, horizontal cabling almost exclusively consists of copper cabling. Fiber optic cabling may be used where situations dictate but, unlike horizontal copper cabling, horizontal fiber optic cabling is not installed in advance as default building facilities. At this writing, horizontal copper cabling in many networks is capable of supporting Gigabit (1Gb/s) Ethernet applications as well as other applications of similar bandwidth.

Permanent Link – A stationary cabling segment, consisting of the permanently installed cable and the permanently affixed jack at both ends (typically at the outlet faceplate and closet patch panel, or on a patch panel on both ends). The concept assumes that, while patch cords might be disconnected or moved over time, the permanent cable and jacks will not be disturbed, and the electrical characteristics of the permanent link will remain unaltered.

Plenum -A space within the building designed for the movement of environmental air; i.e., a space above a suspended ceiling or below an access floor.

Raceway - Any channel designed for holding wires or cables; i.e. conduit, electrical metal tubing, busways, wireways, ventilated flexible cableway.

Spine – also called a backbone, the main communications cables in an IDF.

27 02 30 Project Drawings

A. General Drawing Specifications: Detail and elevation drawings shall be D size (24” x 36”) with a minimum scale of 1/4” = 1’0" or larger. ER, TR and other enlarged detail floor plan drawings shall be D size (24” x 36”) with a minimum scale of 1/4” = 1’0" or larger. Building composite floor plan drawings shall be D size (24” x 36”) with a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’ 0”.

B. Building composite floor plans: Provide building floor plans showing outlet locations and jack configuration, types of jacks, run distance for each jack cable, and cable routing/locations. Identify TO’s that, according to location and available pathway systems, require cable length greater than allowed by standards. Recommend alternatives for Owners Representative’s consideration.

C. Telecommunications space plans/elevations: Include enlarged floor plans of TRs indicating layout of equipment and devices, including receptacles and grounding provisions. Submit detailed plan views and elevations of telecommunications spaces showing racks, termination blocks, and cable paths.

D. Logical Drawings: Provide logical riser or schematic drawings for all systems. Include schematic symbol key.



27 02 50 Substitutions

A. Substitution requests: Substitution requests will be considered only if submitted to Owner’s Representative not less than 7 working days prior to project bid date. Acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution is at Owner’s Representatives sole discretion. No exceptions. Requests for substitutions shall be considered not approved unless approval is issued in writing by Owner’s Representative.

B. Rejection: For equipment, cabling, wiring, materials, and all other products indicated or specified as no substitutions or no alternates, Owner does not expect nor desire requests for substitutions and alternate products other than those specified. Owner reserves right for Owner’s Representative to reject proposed substitution requests and submissions of alternates without review or justification.

27 02 63 Pre-Installation Meeting

A. General: After award, convene a pre-installation meeting at least 14 calendar days prior to commencing SCS and related work. The meeting must be scheduled at least 14 days in advance. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including other trades and utilities if necessary. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work.

B. Agenda: Comply with following agenda specifications:

1. Tour, inspect, and discuss building conditions relating to telecommunications system cabling and equipment, coordination with Telephone Utility Company, Owner’s telecommunications system requirements, and coordination with existing conditions and other work in contract.

2. Review exact location of each item within building construction, casework, and fixtures, and their requirements.

3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.

4. Review drawings and specifications.

5. Review proposed equipment, cabling, and related work.

6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to telecommunications system and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

7. Review required inspections and testing.

8. Review cable routing and support provisions.



27 02 65 Warranty

27 02 65.10 Contractors Warranty A. General requirements: Comply with additional requirements in contract

general requirements and extended warranties required in other specification sections. Refer to all other 27xxx sections for specific additional warranty requirements that exceed or are in addition to those of this section.

B. Contractor warranty: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for successful operation of entire telecommunications system and SCS system for a period of one year after system acceptance. Scope of warranty includes all equipment, devices, wiring, accessories, software, hardware, installation, programming, and configuration required to maintain a complete and operable system. Provide manufacturer’s published recommended preventative maintenance procedures during warranty period. This shall apply to all items except those specifically excluded, or items wherein a longer period of service and warranty is specified or indicated. All warranties shall be effective for one year, minimum, from date Certificate of Final Acceptance is issued. Use of systems provided under this section for temporary services and facilities shall not constitute final acceptance of work nor beneficial use by Owner and shall not institute warranty period. The warranty shall cover repair or replacement of defective materials, equipment, workmanship, and installation that may be incurred during this period. Warranty work is to be done promptly and to Owner’s satisfaction. In addition, warranty shall cover correction of damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under warranty. Additional warranty responsibilities are:

1. Obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturer’s published data without exclusion or limitation, in Owner’s designated name. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as determined by Owner.

2. Provide 2-business day service beginning on date of Substantial Completion and lasting until termination of warranty period. Service shall be at no cost to Owner. Service can be provided by installing contractor or by a separate service organization. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner’s approval. Submit name and a phone number that will be answered on a 24-hour basis each day of week, for duration of service.

3. Submit copies of equipment and material warranties to Owner before final acceptance.

4. At end of warranty period, transfer manufacturers’ equipment and material warranties still in force to Owner.

5. If warranty work problems cannot be corrected immediately to Owner’s satisfaction, advise Owner in writing, describing efforts to correct



situation, and provide analysis of cause for problem. If necessary to resolve problem, provide at no cost services of manufacturer’s engineering and technical staff at site in a

timely manner to analyze warranty issues, and develop recommendations for correction, for review and approval by Owner.

C. Owner’s rights: This section shall not be interpreted to limit Owner’s rights under applicable codes and under this Contract.

D. Pathways Material and Installation warranty: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary to warrant the installation and performance of all pathway materials for a period of one year after beneficial use. Scope of warranty includes all equipment, devices, installation and other work required to maintain a complete and operable system. Provide manufacturers published recommended preventative maintenance procedures during warranty period.

E. Grounding and Bonding Material and Installation warranty: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for successful operation of GBS for a period of one year after beneficial use. Scope of warranty includes all equipment, devices, installation and other work required to maintain a complete and operable system. Provide manufacturers published recommended preventative maintenance procedures during warranty period.

F. Firestopping Material and Installation warranty: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary to warrant the performance of all Firestopping material for a period of one year after beneficial use, or longer if required by the local AHJ. Scope of warranty includes all equipment, devices, installation and other work required to maintain a complete and operable system. Provide manufacturers published recommended preventative maintenance procedures during warranty period.

27 02 65.20 SCS Manufacturers Extended Warranty

A. SCS Systems will be covered by a two-part certification program provided by a single manufacturer and that manufacturer's certified vendor. Manufacturer shall administer a follow-on program through the Vendor to provide support and service to the purchaser. The first part is an assurance program, which provides that the certified system will support the applications for which it is designed, during the 25year warranty of the certified system.

B. The second portion of the certification is a 25-year warranty provided by the manufacturer and the vendor on all products within the system (cords, telecommunications outlet/connectors, cables, cross-connects, patch panels, etc.).

C. If the certified system ceases to support the certified application(s), whether at the time of cutover, during normal use or when upgrading, the manufacturer and vendor shall commit to promptly implement corrective action.



D. Documentation proving the cabling system's compliance to the End-to-End Link Performance recommendations, as listed in ANSI/TIA-568-C shall be provided by the Vendor prior to the structured cabling system being installed.

E. The cabling system must conform to the current issue of industry standard TIA-568. All performance requirements of this document must be followed. As well, workmanship and installation methods used shall be equal to or better than that found in the BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Service International) ITSIM manual.

F. Purchaser demands strict adherence to the performance specifications listed in ANSI/TIA-568-C series standards.

G. Manufacturer shall maintain ISO Quality Control registration for the facilities that manufacturer the product used in this cabling system.

27 02 67 Completeness of Work

A. Complete and usable work: The contractor is responsible for providing complete and usable work per contract documents. All materials and equipment shall be provided with all accessories and additional work required for field conditions, as well as additional work and accessories required for complete, usable, and fully functional construction and systems, even if not explicitly specified or indicated. Telecommunications system in this Contract shall be provided as complete and operable systems in full compliance with requirements on drawings and specification requirements. Drawings are diagrammatic and specifications are performance-based, and Contractor shall provide all work required to comply with drawings and specifications, even if not explicitly indicated or specified. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating installation of electrical systems with all field conditions and work of other trades. Minimum clearances and work required for compliance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code® (NEC®), and manufacturer’s instructions shall be provided. Comply with additional requirements indicated for access and clearances. Contractor shall verify all field conditions and dimensions that affect selection and provision of materials and equipment, and shall provide any disassembly, reassembly, relocation, demolition, cutting and patching required to provide work specified or indicated, including relocation and reinstallation of existing wiring and equipment. Contractor shall protect from damage resulting from Contractor’s operations existing facility, equipment, and wiring. Extra charges for completion and contract time extension will not be allowed because of field conditions or additional work required for complete and usable construction and systems. Comply with additional requirements indicated for access and clearances.

B. Drawings and specifications form complementary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Except where explicitly modified by a specific notation to contrary, it shall be understood that indication or description of



any item, in drawings or specifications or both, carries with it instruction to furnish and install item, provided complete.

C. Terms: As used in this specification, provide means furnish and install. Furnish means “to purchase and deliver to project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support,” and install means “to unload at delivery point at site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at proper location in project.”

D. Authority approvals: Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees, and obtain necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction as required to perform work per all legal requirements and with Specifications, Drawings, Addenda and Change Orders, all of which are part of Contract Documents.

E. Supplementary items: Provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. Examine project drawings and other Sections of specifications for requirements that affect work of this section. Completely coordinate work of this section with work of other Sections and provide a complete and fully functional installation. Refer to all other drawings and other specifications sections that indicate types of construction in which work shall be installed and work of other sections with which work of this section must be coordinated

F. Quantities: Items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents shall be provided in quantities necessary to complete work.

27 02 70 Project Conditions

A. Field verification: Carefully verify location, use and status of all material, equipment, and utilities that are specified, indicated, or deemed necessary for removal. Verify that all materials, equipment, and utilities to be removed are completely inactive and will not be required or in use after completion of project. Replace with equivalent any material, equipment and utilities that were removed by Contractor that are required to be left in place.

B. Existing utilities: As applicable, do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services per requirements indicated:

1. Notify owner in writing at least 14 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

2. Equipment installation:

a. Determine suitable path for moving unit substation into place; consider Project conditions.



b. Verify clearance requirements and locate equipment to meet installation tolerances.

c. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated to those required to suit Project.

27 02 73 Delivery Storage and Handling

A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for the deliveries, storing and handling of all materials relative to the SCS systems, including materials supplied by others that are part of the SCS installation contract. Material shall be stored and protected per manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all material during installation. For all material provided by contractor, or delivered to contractor on site, contractor assumes full responsibility and liability for any material shortages, damage or loss due to storage and handling methods.

27 02 75 Permits and Inspections

A. General: All telecommunications systems shall meet or exceed the latest requirements of all national, state, county, municipal, and other authorities exercising jurisdiction over the telecommunications systems and the Project.

B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, and inspection fees required by local agencies and/or other agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Contractor agrees to furnish any additional labor or material required to comply with all local and other agencies having jurisdiction at no additional cost.

D. Contractor shall obtain certificates of inspection and approval from all authorities having jurisdiction, and forward copies of same to Owner’s Representative prior to request for Project acceptance inspections, completion inspections, substantial completion inspections, and acceptance testing/demonstrations.

E. All required permits and inspection certificates shall be made available at the completion of the telecommunications system installation and commissioning.

F. Any portion of the telecommunications work which is not subject to the requirements of an electric code published by a specific AHJ shall be governed by the National Electrical Code and other applicable sections of the National Fire Code, as published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

G. Installation procedures, methods and conditions shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).



27 02 77 Examination

A. General: Prior to submitting a proposal, Contractor shall examine site, review Project drawings and specifications, and determine exact extent of work required. Contractor shall include in their proposals all materials, labor, and equipment required to complete required work indicated. Work that is necessary to obtain complete and usable Project as specified herein shall be included in Contractor’s proposal, even if not indicated or specified.

B. Bidders’ questions: Should bidders have questions as to intent of drawings and specifications, quality of materials to be used, and work to be performed, questions shall be submitted in writing to Owner’s Representative in manner dictated by Owner’s Representative. All answers and clarifications to drawings and specifications will be issued in writing.

C. Extra payment will not be allowed for claims for due to unfamiliarity with work to be performed by other trades, existing conditions at job site, local or state laws and codes, and alterations due to field conditions.

27 02 79 Additional Costs

A. General: Project acceptance inspections, completion inspections, substantial completion inspections, and acceptance testing/demonstrations shall be conducted after verification of system operation and completeness by Contractor.

B. Inspections and testing: For Project acceptance inspections, final completion inspections, substantial completion inspections, and/or testing/demonstrations that require more than one site visit by Owner’s Representative or Architect/Engineer to verify Project compliance for same material or equipment, Owner reserves right to obtain compensation from Contractor to defray cost of additional site visits that result from Project construction or testing deficiencies/incompleteness, incorrect information, or non-compliance with Project provisions. Owner’s Representative will notify Contractor of hourly rates and travel expenses for additional site visits, and will issue an invoice to Contractor for additional site visits. Payment of additional site visit costs by Contractor is required within 30 days of invoicing. Owner reserves right to deduct additional costs defined herein that are indicated on past due invoices from Project amount due Contractor.

C. Exclusions: Contractor shall not be eligible for extensions of Project schedule or additional charges resulting from additional site visits that result from Project construction or testing deficiencies/incompleteness, incorrect information, or noncompliance with Project provisions.



27 04 00 Execution

27 04 01 General Requirements

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate various elements of telecommunications system, materials, and equipment. Comply with following requirements as a minimum.

B. Coordinate systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for wiring, cabling, and equipment installations.

E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in building.

G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide maximum headroom and access for service and maintenance as possible.

H. Coordinate connection of materials, equipment, and systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

I. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. In case of conflict among individual system requirements, request direction in writing from Owner’s Representative.

J. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed in both exposed and unexposed spaces.

K. Install cabling, wiring, and equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.



L. Provide access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

N. Comply with all requirements and work indicated on drawings.

O. Avoid interference with structure and with work or other trades, preserving adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways to satisfaction of Owner and per code requirements.

P. Install equipment and cabling/wiring to properly distribute equipment loads on building structural members provided for equipment support under other Sections. Roof-mounted equipment shall be installed and supported on structural steel or roof curbs as appropriate.

Q. Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as necessary for floor, wall and ceiling mounting of equipment as required.

R. Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides, and other support hardware.

S. Obtain and analyze catalog data, weights, and other pertinent data required for proper coordination of equipment support provisions and installation.

T. Structural steel and hardware shall conform to ASTM standard specifications. Use of steel and hardware shall conform to requirements of AISC Code of Practice: Section Five.

U. Verify site conditions and dimensions of equipment to ensure access for proper installation of equipment without disassembly that would void warranty.

27 04 10 Equipment Installation

A. General: Install equipment per manufacturer’s written instructions. Install equipment level and plumb. Install wiring and cabling between equipment and all related devices.

B. Mounting: If neither the Owner’s Instructions nor the individual section call out the required hardware mounting, use the following.

1. For equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on structural steel channel strut bolted to wall

2. For equipment not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and slotted structural steel channel strut

3. Use feet consisting of 0.25-inch thick steel plates, 6 square inch, bolted to floor



4. Use feet for welded attachment of vertical posts not over 3 feet on center

5. Connect posts with horizontal U channel steel strut and bolt control equipment to channels

C. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Connections: Tighten wiring connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings, to include lugs, screws and bolts per equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. In absence of published connection or terminal torque values, comply with torque values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

27 04 30 Cutting and Patching

A. General: Perform cutting and patching per contract general requirements. In addition, following requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to uncover existing infrastructure to provide access for correction of improperly installed existing or new Work.

2. Remove and replace defective Work.

3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.

4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

B. Demolition and removal: Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of material, equipment, devices, and other items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by new Work. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

C. Protection of work: Protect structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for original installation and experienced Installers.

27 04 33 Penetrations and Sleeves

A. General: Coordinate work with other sections. SCS Installation Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of cabling sleeves and conduits unless



specifically provided by the Electrical Contractor. SCS Installation Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor to determine exact requirements.

B. When required, set sleeves in forms before concrete is poured. Provide core drilling as necessary if walls are poured or otherwise constructed without sleeves and wall penetration is required. Do not penetrate structural members. Provide sleeves and packing materials at all penetrations of foundations, walls, slabs (except on-grade), partitions, and floors. Sleeves shall meet requirements of pertinent specifications. Lay out penetration and sleeve openings in advance, to permit provision in work. Set sleeves and conduit in forms before concrete is poured. Provide remedial work where sleeves and conduits are omitted or improperly placed.

C. Sleeve fill: Sleeves that penetrate outside walls, basement slabs, footings, and beams shall be waterproof.

1. Fill slots, sleeves and other openings in floors or walls if not used.

2. Fill spaces in openings after installation of conduit or cable.

3. Fill for floor penetrations shall prevent passage of water, smoke, fire, and fumes.

4. Fill shall be fire resistant in fire floors and walls, and shall prevent passage of air, smoke and fumes. See section - Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems.

5. Sleeves through floors shall be watertight and shall extend 2 inches above floor surface.

6. Where raceways passing through openings are exposed in finished rooms,

finishes of filling materials shall match and be flush with adjoining floor,

ceiling, and wall finishes.

D. Conduit sleeves:

1. Annular space between conduit and sleeve shall be at least 1/4 inch.

2. Sleeves shall not be provided for slabs-on-grade unless specified or indicated otherwise.

3. For sleeves through rated fire walls and smoke partitions, comply with requirements for firestopping. See section - Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems.

E. Supports: Do not support piping risers or conduit on sleeves.

F. Future use: Identify unused sleeves and slots for future installation.



27 04 36 Core Drilling

A. General: Core drilling shall be avoided where possible. Where core drilling is unavoidable, locate all required openings prior to coring.

B. Coordinate openings with other trades and utilities and prevent damage to structural reinforcement.

C. Thoroughly investigate existing conditions in vicinity of required opening prior to coring.

D. Set sleeves prior to installation of structure for passage of pipes, conduit, ducts, etc. Protect all areas from damage.

27 04 39 Cleaning

A. Contractor is responsible for cleanup of debris daily. Cost of cleanup is the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. During progress of work, remove equipment and unused material. Put building and premises in neat and clean condition. Perform cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of equipment to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

C. After completion of Project, clean exterior surface of all equipment, including concrete residue, dirt, and paint residue. Final cleaning shall be performed prior to Project acceptance by Owner’s Representative.

27 04 50 Access and Access Panels

A. General: Provide access to materials and equipment that require inspection, replacement, repair or service. Provide access panels and/or doors as required to allow service of all equipment components. Provide access panels where items installed require access and are concealed in floor, wall, furred space or above ceiling. Ceilings consisting of lay-in or removable splined tiles do not require access panels. Locations of equipment requiring access shall be noted on record drawings. Access panels shall have same fire rating classification as surface penetrated.

B. Coordination: Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access panels required to fully service equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. Construction: Panels shall be at least 12 inches by 12 inches and located to provide optimum access to equipment for maintenance and servicing. Verify access panel locations and construction with Owner’s Representative.

27 04 60 Startup and Operational Testing

A. General: Owner maintains right to have access to entire project site to prepare facility for occupancy and operation. Completion of startup and field testing shall be accomplished as a prerequisite for substantial completion. Operate



and maintain systems and equipment until final acceptance by Owner. All guarantees and warranties shall not begin until final acceptance of systems and equipment by Owner. Acceptance requires, at a minimum, complete systems startup and testing.

27 04 70 Special Responsibilities and Information

A. Coordination of information: Cooperate and coordinate with work of other sections in executing work of this section. Perform work such that progress of entire project, including work of other sections, shall not be interfered with or delayed. Provide information as requested on items furnished under this section, which shall be installed under other sections. Obtain detailed installation information from manufacturers of equipment provided under this section.

B. Information gathering: Obtain final rough-in dimensions or other information as needed for complete installation of items furnished under other sections or by Owner. Keep fully informed as to shape, size and position of openings required for material or equipment to be provided under this and other sections. Give full information so that openings required by work of this section may be coordinated with other work and other openings and may be provided for in advance. In case of failure to provide sufficient information in proper time, provide cutting and patching or have same done, at no expense to Owner.

C. Housekeeping pads: Provide information as requested as to sizes, number and locations of concrete housekeeping pads necessary for floor mounted equipment

D. Maintenance of equipment and systems: Maintain equipment and systems until Final Acceptance. Ensure adequate protection of equipment and material during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown and during delays pending final test of systems and equipment because of seasonal conditions.

E. Use of premises: Use of premises shall be restricted as directed by Owner’s Representative and as required below:

1. Cleaning and rubbish removal: Remove and dispose of dirt and debris and keep premises clean. During progress of work, remove equipment and unused material. Put building and premises in neat and clean condition and do cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and operation of equipment, to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

2. Rubbish Removal: Provide for the removal from the site of all spoils, debris, boxes, packaging, crates, and trash generated from the work.

3. Storage: Store materials maintaining an orderly, clean appearance. If stored on site in open or unprotected areas, all equipment and material



shall be kept off ground by means of pallets or racks and covered with tarpaulins. F. Protection of fireproofing:

1. Clips, hangers, clamps, supports and other attachments to surfaces to be fireproofed shall be installed, if possible, prior to start of spray fire proofing work.

2. Conduits and other items that would interfere with proper application of fireproofing shall be installed after completion of spray fire proofing work.

3. Patching and repairing of fireproofing due to cutting or damaging to fireproofing during course of work specified under this section shall be performed by installer of fireproofing and paid for by section responsible for damage and shall not constitute grounds for an extra to Owner.

G. Temporary utilities: Refer to contract general requirements regarding requirements.

H. Movement of materials: Unload materials and equipment delivered to site. Pay costs for rigging, hoisting, lowering and moving equipment on and around site, in building or on roof.

27 04 80 Division of Work

A. Contractor holding contract with Owner is responsible for coordinating work of all subcontractors to provide a complete and usable Project complying with contract provisions of Project documents.

B. Failure to coordinate work by subcontractors and suppliers will not be considered justification for additional compensation or extension of schedule.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26-1

SECTION 27 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.


1.6 Pre-Installation Meeting

1. After award, convene a pre-installation meeting at least 14 calendar days prior to commencing related work. The meeting must be scheduled at least 14 days in advance. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of CCHHS section, including other trades and utilities if necessary. Review conditions of operations,

1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2

SUMMARY


1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding busbars.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.

B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.

D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans,



procedures and coordination with related work. 2. Tour, inspect, and discuss building conditions relating to telecommunications system

cabling and equipment, CCHHS telecommunications system requirements, and coordination with existing conditions and other work. Review exact location of each item within building construction, casework, and fixtures, and their requirements.

3. Inspect all telecommunication pathways to verify size and quantity to meet CCHHS

standards. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.


a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection. b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding

electrode. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a registered communications distribution designer to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

B. ANSI/TIA 1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure

C. BICSI(Building Industry Consulting Services International) CO-OSP Customer Owned Outside Plant Manual

D. BICSI 13th Edition Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

E. BICSI 3rd Edition Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

F. FCC Rules and Regulations

G. J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications



H. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code

I. TIA 568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

J. TIA 569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

K. TIA 758-A Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

2.2

CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 1. Panduit Corp.

B. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19- strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.

C. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:

1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG [26 kcmils (13.3 sq. mm)] and not longer than 12 inches (300 mm). If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70

for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

C. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

D. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor

grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed for the purpose.



E. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch (15.8- or 25.4-mm) centers for a two- bolt connection to the busbar.

F. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS

A. The TMGB shall be a minimum of ¼ thick, 4” wide, and 12” in length.

B. TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Bus Bar) shall be located in TR’s. The TGB shall be a

minimum of 10” long and 2” wide by ¼ “thick.

C. A TBB (Telecommunication Bonding Backbone) shall connect the TMGB (Telecommunication Main Grounding Bus Bar) and TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Bus Bar).

D. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product

by one of the following: 1. Panduit Corp.

2.5 LABELING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

1. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal

transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work.

D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,



and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

C. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

D. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.

E. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

F. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

G. Conductor Support: Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches ((900 mm).)

H. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,

and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch (900-mm) intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 1-inch (21-mm) PVC conduit until conduit

enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated. a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond

the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

5. All basket tray, ladder rack, equipment racks and or cabinets within the MDF and IDF shall be grounded/ bonded to the TMGB or TGB. A minimum size BC (bonding conductor) of 6 AWG shall be used.

3.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS

A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated

spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 12 inches (300 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CONNECTIONS



A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

E. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications

equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard.

F. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or

rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

1. Waveguides and Coaxial Cable:

a. Bond cable shields at the point of entry into the building to the TGB and to the cable entrance plate, using No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.

b. Bond coaxial cable surge arrester to the ground or roof ring using bonding conductor size recommended by surge-arrester manufacturer.

3.6 TYPICAL BUILDING GROUNDING AND BONDING



3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space

identifier for the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for

the space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment

point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"





1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation.

a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding

electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.

3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not

more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.

a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system

electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB[ and in each TGB]. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds [5] <Insert value>

ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 27 05 26


PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0528-1

SECTION 27 05 28 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Optical-Fiber cable pathways and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface pathways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways,

surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports. 3. Building composite floor plans: Provide building floor plans showing outlet locations and

jack configuration, types of jacks, run distance for each jack cable, and cable routing/locations. Identify telecommunication outlets that, according to location and



available pathway systems, require cable length greater than allowed by standards. Recommend alternatives for Owners Representative’s consideration.

4. Telecommunications space plans/elevations: Include enlarged floor plans of TRs indicating layout of equipment and devices, including receptacles and grounding provisions. Submit detailed plan views and elevations of telecommunications spaces showing racks, termination blocks, and cable paths.

5. Logical Drawings: Provide logical riser or schematic drawings for all systems. Include schematic symbol key.

6. The final Construction Documents shall include marked IT locations with the designated CCHHS labeling scheme with excel spread sheet from the design team, contact CCHHS with questions.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.



1. After award, convene a pre-installation meeting at least 14 calendar days prior to

commencing related work. The meeting must be scheduled at least 14 days in advance. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of CCHHS section, including other trades and utilities if necessary. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work.

2. Tour, inspect, and discuss building conditions relating to telecommunications

system cabling and equipment, CCHHS telecommunications system requirements, and coordination with existing conditions and other work. Review exact location of each item within building construction, casework, and fixtures, and their requirements.

3. Inspect all telecommunication pathways to verify size and quantity to meet

CCHHS standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

B. C.


BICSI(Building Industry Consulting Services International) CO-OSP Customer Owned Outside Plant Manual











2.2

TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM (TR) – PATCH PANEL

A. Category 6A RJ45 Uniprise patch panel.

2.4 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

1. Basket tray or conduit system shall connect the MDF and the vertical

communications infrastructure within a building.

2. The typical MDF shall consist of (1) four-post equipment rack, 30” deep, (2) two-post equipment racks, 16” deep, (2) 6” wide vertical cable managers, and (2) 10” wide vertical cable managers The racks and vertical cable management shall be the Amco Titan Cable Management (TCM) solution in black. Two PDU brackets shall be installed on each TCM rack. Two TCM ladder/tray brackets shall be installed on each rack for pathway support.

a. Amco TCMR-45U-30/116T – Black 30” rack b. Amco TCMR-45U-16/116T – Black 16” rack c. Amco TCMFD-45U-10/116T – Black 10” vertical manager d. Amco TCMFD-45U-10/116T – Black 6” vertical manager e. Amco TCM-PDU-45U – Black PDU bracket f. Amco TCM-ULB – Black ladder rack/tray bracket

3. Patch Panels

a. CommScope 48 port modular angled patch panels shall be installed.

CommScope 760162818 | UNP-6A-DM-2U-48

4. Horizontal Management

a. An Eaton/Bline 4RU Horizontal Manager (SB87019S4FB) shall be installed in the middle of rack just below the last patch panel to provide a pathway for patching.

5. Ladder Rack

a. Eaton/Bline 18” wide ladder rack (SB17U18BFB) shall be installed in the TR. b. The contractor shall further furnish and install all necessary brackets,



mounts, supports, and clamps to provide a complete tray system in compliance with manufacturer requirements.

6. PDU and UPS

a. Eaton ePDU

For bidding purposes, use Eaton EMI101-10 ePDU – L5-20P input smart metered input G3 ePDU with (24) 5-20R vertical

Coordination with the CCHHS and the electrical contractor is required to determine power requirements and outlet types.

b. Eaton UPS

Coordination with the CCHHS and the electrical contractor is required to determine power requirements, size and outlet types.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM (TR)

1. Basket tray or conduit system shall connect the TR, TO and the vertical infrastructure.

2. The buildings vertical riser shall connect all of the TR’s and the TR’s to the MDF and shall be accessible on each floor.

3. The typical TR shall consist of (3) two-post equipment racks, (2) 6” wide vertical

cable managers, and (2) 10” wide vertical cable managers The racks and vertical cable management shall be the Amco Titan Cable Management (TCM) solution in black.

4. Patch Panels

a. CommScope 48 port modular angled patch panels shall be installed.

5. Horizontal Management

a. An Eaton/Bline 4RU Horizontal Manager shall be installed in the middle

of rack just below the last patch panel to provide a pathway for patching.

6. Ladder Rack

a. Eaton/Bline 18” wide ladder rack shall be installed in the TR.

7. The contractor shall further furnish and install all necessary brackets, mounts, supports, and clamps to provide a complete tray system in compliance with manufacturer requirements.

8. PDU and UPS

a. Eaton ePDU

Eaton EM104-10 ePDU – L6-30P input smart metered input G3 ePDU with

(36) C13 and (6) C19 vertical



Coordination with the CCHHS and the electrical contractor is required to determine power requirements and outlet types.

b. Eaton UPS

Coordination with CCHHS and the electrical contractor is required to determine power requirements, size and outlet types.

2.6 FIBER OPTIC INFRASTRUCTURE

A. Cabling shall be plenum rated and suitable for use within air handling spaces.

1. The fiber backbone cabling shall consist of a 12 strand pre-terminated MPO trunk of

CommScope TeraSpeed fiber and a 24 strand pre-terminated MPO trunk of CommScope LazrSpeed 550 (OM4) fiber.

2. Network Point of Presence (NetPOP)

a. Rack mount fiber enclosure

CommScope 760231449 | SD-1U b. Multimode Fiber Module

ReadyPATCH® LazrSPEED® OM4 Standard Module

CommScope 760167916 | RP-MOD-024-LS-MPO-LC02 c. Singlemode Fiber Module

ReadyPATCH® TeraSPEED® Singlemode Standard Module

CommScope 760167874 | RP-MOD-012-TS-MPO-LC02

3. Main Distribution Frame (MDF)


CommScope 760231464 | SD-4U b. Multimode Fiber Modules

ReadyPATCH® LazrSPEED® OM4 Standard Module

CommScope 760167916 | RP-MOD-024-LS-MPO-LC02 c. Singlemode Fiber Modules

ReadyPATCH® TeraSPEED® Singlemode Standard Module CommScope 760167874 | RP-MOD-012-TS-MPO-LC02

d. Armored OM4 MPO (F) to MPO (F), Pre-Terminated Trunk Cable, 24-Fiber, Plenum with pulling grip

CommScope FZXMPMPAF-MCFXXX (XXX= feet) e. Armored SM MPO (F) to MPO(F), Pre-Terminated Trunk Cable, 12-Fiber,

Plenum with pulling grip CommScope FZWMPMPAD-JCFXXX

(XXX = feet) f. The contractor shall determine the length of the pre-terminated trunk cable.

4. Telecommunication Room (TR)




CommScope 760231449 | SD-1U

b. Multimode Fiber Modules

ReadyPATCH® LazrSPEED® OM4 Standard Module CommScope 760167916 | RP-MOD-024-LS-MPO-LC02

c. Singlemode Fiber Modules ReadyPATCH® TeraSPEED® Singlemode Standard Module CommScope 760167874 | RP-MOD-012-TS-MPO-LC02

d. Armored OM4 MPO (F) to MPO (F), Pre-Terminated Trunk Cable, 24 strand, Plenum, with pulling grip

CommScope FZXMPMPAF-MCFXXX (XXX= feet) e. Armored SM MPO (F) to MPO(F), Pre-Terminated Trunk Cable, 12 strand,

Plenum with pulling grip

CommScope FZWMPMPAD-JCFXXX (XXX = feet) f. LC to LC fiber Jumper LazrSPEED

CommScope FEXLCLC42-MXMXXX (XXX = meters) g. LC to LC fiber Jumper TeraSPEED

CommScope FEWLCLC42-JXMXXX (XXX = meters) h. If wall mount fiber enclosure is needed at the demarcation point, use

the following: Ready™ Wall Mount Building Enclosure, 4P, black

CommScope 760147504 | WBE-EMT-BK-4P-PNL 2.7 COPPER INFRASTRUCTURE

1. NetPOP to MDF

a. 50 pair ARMM type copper cables b. 110 style blocks (both sides)

CommScope 569439-1

2. MDF to each TR

a. 25 pair ARMM type copper cables b. 24 port modular angled patch panels shall be installed (each TR). c. 110 style blocks (MDF)

3. These are minimum standards for the amount of copper cable necessary to support

the building. CCHHS requirements may increase the size of the cable necessary to support the users.

4. Low voltage cabling shall plenum rated and suitable for use within air handling spaces.

2.8 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.



2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Southwire Company. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 5. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 6. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

2.9 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS


following:

1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Endot Industries Inc. 4. IPEX. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for general-use installation unless otherwise indicated.


intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

2.10 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by





C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.11 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


following: a. Panduit Corp. b. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Tele-Power Poles:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Panduit Corp. b. Wiremold / Legrand.

2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.

2.12 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


following: 1. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 2. Mono-Systems, Inc. 3. RACO; Hubbell. 4. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 5. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.



C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. The Hanson Park Project is designed as plenum return and it is prohibitive to run basket

trays in the ceiling for the telecommunication cables. Contractor to extend as many conduits as required per “Conduit Fill Table” in item B below to serve the information outlets, WAP’s and any other low voltage devices on this project. No Basket Tray or Cable Tray to be used in the ceiling and only conduit and plenum rated cables are to be installed in the ceiling for low voltage devices.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT 5. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber

or Communications Cable: EMT. 6. Contractor is responsible for running EMT conduit between each TR room and

information outlet to meet City of Chicago Plenum requirements.



B. Conduit Fill Capacity

Conduit Fill Capacity

40%

HIS Conduit fill ratio Chart

Conduit Size Quantity of Cables Allowed

1” 4

1 ¼” 7

1 ½” 10

2” 17

2 ½” 30

3” 45

4” 75

C. All information outlets shall be serviced with 1” conduit to pull box via horizontal conduit system. Conduits shall service only (1) information outlet. No daisy chaining or looping between information outlets is allowed. 4-11/16” x 4-11/16” x 2 1/8 deep electrical box shall be installed with a single gang trim ring.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or

hot- water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

F. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.



G. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

H. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

I. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

J. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

K. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

L. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger,

use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

M. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

N. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

O. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

P. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.



R. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

S. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members

or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

T. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

U. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

V. The typical wireless access point (WAP) location shall consist of two (2) CommScope/Uniprise

Blue Category 6A cables. Low voltage cabling shall plenum rated and suitable for use within air handling spaces.

W. The typical time clock location shall consist of one (1) CommScope/Uniprise Blue Category 6A

cable. Low voltage cabling shall plenum rated and suitable for use within air handling spaces.

X. The typical workstation location shall consist of one (1) CommScope/Uniprise Blue Category 6A jack and one (1) CommScope/Uniprise White Category 6A jack.

Y. Large offices will receive two (2) typical workstation locations. Large offices are defined by

offices that contain tables or couches in addition to the desk.

Z. Faceplates: 1. Office/Wall Locations shall use the CommScope 2 Port faceplate: 2. Furniture Locations shall use the CommScope 3 Port Furniture faceplate: 3. Wall phone locations shall use the CommScope Stainless Steel wall phone plate: 4. Locations requiring a 1 port faceplate shall use the CommScope 1 Port faceplate: 5. A blank shall be installed in any unused openings and shall match the color of the

faceplate.

AA. All station cable will be secured and dressed with Velcro strapping, no cable ties allowed.

BB. Do not install compressed, kinked, scored, deformed or abraded cable, or allow such damage to occur.

CC. All labels containing the location label shall be installed in the top label holder of the face plate

in vertical oriented locations and on the left label holder on horizontal oriented locations.

DD. All locations shall be labeled with the TR the information outlet is terminated in. The label will contain just the TR room number.

EE. All labels containing the TR number shall be installed in the bottom label holder on vertical oriented locations, and on the right label holder on horizontal oriented locations.

FF. Each cable shall be labeled at both ends with the approved CCHHS labeling standard.

Panduit label maker of approved equivalent shall be used; no hand written labels will be accepted.

GG. Telecommunication Outlets (TO) conduit or raceway shall not be shared with other low

voltage cabling.

HH. The cabling system must conform to the current issue of industry standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.



All performance requirements of CCHHS document must be followed. Workmanship and installation methods used shall be equal to or better than that found in the BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Service International), ITSI manual. Low voltage cabling shall plenum rated and suitable for use within air handling spaces.

II. Information outlets installed in modular furniture shall be coordinated with CCHHS Project

Manager, and shall comply with CommScope /Uniprise Solution.

JJ. J-Hooks shall not be use as a main horizontal distribution pathway.

1. The use of J-Hooks shall be approved by CCHHS prior to installation.

KK. Conduits shall not run continuously for more than 100’ before installing a pull

box. LL. Conduits shall not exceed more than Two (2) 90-degree bends without a pull

box. MM. A third 90 degree bend is acceptable if: 1. The total conduit run is reduced by 15%. 2. The conduit size is increased to the next trade size. 3. One of the ends is located within 12” of the cable feed end.

NN. Each conduit shall contain a nylon pull cord with 200 lbs. pulling tension.

OO. No unilet (90-degree bend with a removable cover) type fittings of any size are to be used

for communications conduit, the use of a pull box is required in place of a unilet.

PP. No PVC or PVC sleeves are to be used for communication conduit within the confines of a building.

QQ. All conduits shall be properly grounded, per electrical code.

RR. The sharing of TO conduits with multiple disciplines is prohibited.

3.3 LABELING STANDARD

1. The contractor shall label the entire communications cabling system for future maintainability

and troubleshooting. 2. All station cables shall be labeled at the faceplate, the patch panel jack or port, and the rear of

the patch panel above or below the 110 punchdown (for UTP) or jack or port position (fiber or coax) indicating location number.

3. The contractor shall coordinate with CCHHS on layout of label.

4. Hand written labels are not acceptable. 5. Both ends of the cable must labeled with a Brady type label with its permanent cable number



3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways andCabling."

3.5

FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6

PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer

3.7 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION

A. All cables shall be tested in both directions using an approved category 6A tester. All results will be placed on a CD in CSV format. All cables shall be tested and comply with ANSI/TIA standards to verify link / channel performance based on the ANSI 568 B article 11 standard for category 6A testing and verification.

B. Acceptance testing shall be completed and documentation provided to CCHHS as soon as

possible in order to permit the installation of networking equipment necessary to bring the building online for security and equipment monitoring systems.



1. Provide installation testing of equipment where required by manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Provide complete end to end testing for all copper and fiber optic systems/channels based on latest applicable standards. Document all testing and submit with final as-built submittal package.

3. Prior to substantial completion and project acceptance inspection, submit test reports to indicated scope of startup and operational tests, with results of testing for each specified operation.

4. Transmission performance of structured cabling varies with length, connecting hardware, cords and total number of connections. The installer must take care to properly install the cabling components. To ensure that the installed structured cabling solution meets or exceeds the required performance it must be ‘tested’ or ‘certified’.

5. The requirements for each category of cabling (Cat5e, Cat6, or Cat6A) and optical

fiber optics links are located in the ANSI/TIA-568 series standards.

6. Test equipment must meet the requirements set forth in the ANSI/TIA-568 series Standard for Field Test Equipment. All Copper testers shall be Level III. All fiber testers shall meet the requirements in ANSI/TIA-568.

7. Field Power Meters shall meet the following: • Accuracy ± 0.2 dB • Resolution 0.01 dB • Precision ± 0.15 dB

8. The Field light source shall meet the following: • Accuracy ±0.01 Db • 850 ± 30 nm • 1300 ± 50 nm • 1310 ± 30 nm • 1550 ± 30 nm

9. The calibration on all test equipment shall be current. The software in all test equipment shall be current.

C. The following manufacturer’s testers are approved.

1. FLUKE a. DTX1800 b. OptiFiber OTDR c. DTX-CLT CertiFiber Optical Loss Test Set Ideal

d. LanTEK II e. LANTEK 6/6A/7G f. FIBERTEK

2. Or other test equipment approved by the Owner

D. Documentation 1. At minimum, the data provided must include the following elements:

• Provide record plant documentation, including jack type Telecommunication Outlet (TO), jack location, circuit length, fiber riser cable lengths, and copper backbone cable lengths and any other information deemed to be useful.

• The documentation format(s) will be agreed upon between CCHHS and the contractor.

• Provide all documentation in electronic format.



• Cable routing. • Riser and OSP cable, pair (count), locations, and final cable lengths. • Supporting structures. • Terminal locations and IDs. • TR and terminal details. • Pull box locations, elevations installed at and sizes. • TO locations, label ID’s, types, and serving TR’s.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0529-1

Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1. Work Includes

The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the system of non-continuous cable supports as described in this specification.

1.2. Scope of Work

This Section includes the minimum requirements for the support structures for the Communications Systems for the project as outlined in the Bid Document. A. Non-continuous cable supports (2.3A) B. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling (2.3B) C. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies (2.3C) D. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from tee bar (2.3D) E. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from drop wire/ceiling (2.3E) F. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from beam, flange (2.3F) G. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from C & Z Purlin (2.3G) H. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from wall, concrete, or joist (2.3H) I. Non-

continuous cable support assemblies from threaded rod (2.3I) J. Raised floor non-continuous cable support assemblies (2.3J) K. Cantilever-Mounted Option for non-continuous cable supports (2.3K) L. Installation accessories for non-continuous cable supports (2.3L)

1.3. Submittals

Submit product data on non-continuous cable support devices, including attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.

1.4. Quality Assurance

A. Non-continuous cable supports and cable support assemblies shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for both Canadian and US standards (cULus).

B. Non-continuous cable supports shall have the manufacturers name and part number stamped on the part for identification.

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of five years documented experience in the industry, and certified ISO 9000.

1.5. Coordination

Coordinate installation of hangers supports and cables with other trades.



PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1. References

ANSI/TIA-568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard ANSI/TIA-569 Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ASTM B 695-90 Standard Specification for coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A109 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon, Cold-Rolled ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip ASTM A480/A480M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. ASTM A568 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low- Alloy Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled A653 G60-Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTM A682 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, High-Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Spring Quality ASTM A879 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface ASTM B117 Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing ASTM D610 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces UL 2043 - Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces NFPA 70 National Electrical Code®

2.2. Non-continuous Cable Support Systems

A. Non-continuous cable supports 1. Non-continuous cable supports shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to

comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables; cULus Listed 2. Non-continuous cable supports shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing

cables 3. Non-continuous cable supports sized 1-5/16” and larger shall have a cable retainer strap

to provide containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces

4. Non-continuous cable supports shall have an electro-galvanized or G60 finish and shall be rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments

5. Stainless Steel non-continuous cable supports are intended for indoor and outdoor use in non-corrosive environments or where only mildly corrosive conditions apply.

B. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling



1. Constructed from steel and woven laminate; sling length can be adjusted to hold up to 425 4-pair UTP; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments. Rated to support Category 5e and higher cable, or optical fiber cable; cULus Listed.

2. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs. 3. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall be suitable for use in air handling

spaces 4. If required, assemble to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam

clips, flange clips, C and Z purlin clips. C. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies

1. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies shall be used where separate cabling compartments are required. Assemblies may be factory assembled or assembled from pre-packaged kits. Assemblies shall consist of a steel angled hanger bracket holding up to six non-continuous cable supports, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. If required, the multi-tier support bracket may be assembled to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam clamps, flange clips, C and Z purlin clips.

D. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from tee bar

1. Tee bar support bracket with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

E. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from drop wire/ceiling

1. Fastener to wire/rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

F. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from beam, flange

1. Fastener to beam or flange with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

G. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from C & Z Purlin

1. Fastener to C or Z purlin with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed

H. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from wall, concrete, or joist

1. Fastener to wall, concrete, or joist with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed

I. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from threaded rod

1. Fastener to threaded rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed

2. The multi-tiered support bracket shall have a static load limit of 300 lbs. 3. U-hooks and Double J-hook shall attach directly to threaded rod using standard nuts

J. Raised floor non-continuous cable support assemblies



1. Fastener to raised (access) floor pedestal with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; UL Listed

K. Cantilever-Mounted cable supports

1. U-hook shall be able to be assembled to a wide variety of wall mount brackets. 2. Spacing of individual U-hooks as needed, max of 4’ to 5’ apart. 3. U-hooks may have the optional attachment of a cable roller for ease in pulling cables

L. Installation accessories for non-continuous cable supports

1. Cable Pulley

a. Non-continuous cable supports may be used as an installation tool when a removable pulley assembly is included. The pulley shall be made of plastic and be without sharp edges. The pin and bail assembly must be able to be secured to the J-Hook during cable installation. The pulley must remain secured while cables are being pulled.

b. The pin and roller assembly must be removed after cables are installed.

2. Cable Protector

a. The protective steel tube shall fit over threaded rod and be at least 4” in length.

b. The tube shall prevent damage to cables placed in or pulled through CATCMTM U-hooks. The tube shall not inhibit the pulling of cables.

2.3. Finishes

A. ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel B. ASTM B 695 Standard Specification for coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and

Steel C. ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products D. ASTM A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process E. Non-continuous cable supports used where only mildly corrosive conditions apply shall be

stainless steel, AISI type 304.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of the current revision levels of TIA Standards 568 and 569, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), applicable local codes, and to the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Do not exceed load ratings specified by manufacturer. C. Adjustable non-continuous support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs. D. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for allowable fill capacity for each size

noncontinuous cable support. E. Locate pathways per Telecommunications Drawings.



FIRESTOPPING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0532-1

27 05 32 Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems

1. GENERAL

1.1. Scope

A. This SECTION describes the requirements for furnishing and installing firestopping for fire-rated construction. This includes all openings in fire-rated floors, walls and other rated elements of construction, both blank (empty) and those accommodating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc.

B. Fireblocking for Concrete Floor or Wall Sleeved Cables.

C. Fireblocking for Gypsum Wall Sleeved Cables.

D. Fireblocking for Concrete Block Wall Sleeved Cables.

1.2. Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 7 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Cable fill calculations must be included to show the maximum cable fill ratio for each Firestopping System and cable type.

1.3. References:

ANSI/TIA 569 - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC) ASTM E-814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops ASTM E-119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials BOCA – Basic/National Building Code NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code ICBO – Uniform Building Code SSBCCI – Standard Building Code UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops UL Fire Resistance Directory – Penetration Firestops System (XHE2) and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials

1.4. Submittals

A. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation procedures for each type of Firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria and test data. Submit cured samples of firestop materials.

B. Shop drawings: Show typical installation details for the methods of installation. Indicate which firestop materials will be used where and when applications requirements to meet Specific jobsite conditions.



C. Product Data: Shall be clearly marked to indicate all technical information which specifies full compliance with requirements of this section and Contract Documents, including the following:

1. Copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer’s approved modifications.

2. Each condition requiring penetration seals in proposed UL systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation and actual adjacent construction.

D. Applicator’s Qualification Statement: Shall include a list of projects indicating required experience.

1.5. Quality Assurance

A. Firestopping systems (materials and design) shall conform to both Flame (F) ratings and Time (T) ratings as required by local building code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.

B. The work of this section shall be performed by a company which specializes in stalling UL Classified penetration seals required for this Project, with a minimum of five years of documented successful experience and shall be performed by skilled Workmen thoroughly experience in the necessary crafts.

C. Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with the manufacturer’s name, product identification, lot number, UL label, and mixing and installation instructions as applicable.

D. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

E. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life.

1.6. Coordination

A. Coordinate layout and installation of Firestopping System with other trades.

B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the Architect.

C. Storage and Handling: Avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes. Damaged products will not be installed. Store devices and accessories in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic. Wet materials will be unpacked and dried before storage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Manufacturer and Firestopping System must be approved by the local AHJ before purchase or installation



2.2. General

Provide and install firestopping materials to meet applicable codes and installation requirements for each firestopping application. Products using caulking, putties, wrap strips, mortars, composite boards and/or mechanical devices shall be used as appropriate for the specific condition

2.3. Caulking

When caulking is used, provide and install flexible caulking materials. Cured firestop materials 1/8 thick shall be able around a 1” mandrell without breaking

2.4. Firestop

Do not use any firestop products which re-emulsify, leach active intumescent ingredients or dissolve when placed in water after curing. Product must withstand the passage of cold smoke, either as inherent property of the system or using a separate product included as part of the UL system or device, and designed to perform this function.

2.5. Penetration Seals

A. General:

1. Penetration seals (firestopping material) shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

2. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by all three model building codes, Basic/National Building Code, Building Code and Standard Building Code, per National Evaluation Service, Inc. report # NER-243.

3. Materials shall meet requirements of NFPA 101 and NFPA 70.

4. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass, plastic and insulated pipe, conduit, bus duct, non-insulated pipe and ductwork.

5. On insulated pipe, fire-rating classification must not require removal of insulation.

6. The rating of penetration seals shall not be less than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly.

7. Systems shown below are examples and other equal systems may be approved or required by the AHJ. B. 2-hour Rated Concrete Floor:

1. Penetrants: Multiple pipes

2. Firestop as manufactured by:

3. UL System: No. 93

C. 2-hour Rated Concrete Floor:

1. Penetrants: Maximum 30” dia. Metal pipe/conduit


3. UL System: No.319

D. 1-2 –Hour Rated Gypsum Board Wall:



1. Penetrant: Metal pipe/conduit



E. 2-Hour Rated Gypsum Board Wall:

1. Penetrant: Metal pipe/conduit



F. 3-Hour Rated Concrete Wall:

1. Penetrant: Metal duct, maximum 2’ square and maximum dimension of 30”



G. Walls Below Grace:

1. Penetrants: Pipe sleeves.

2. Seal: Thunderline “Link Seal” casing seal

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

Examine the areas and condition where Firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

3.2 Conditions Requiring Firestopping

A. General – Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designed as insulation, safing, or otherwise.

B. At any point where a fire rated wall is penetrated with cable or conduit.

C. Penetrations

1. Penetrations include conduit, cable wire, pipe, duct or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall or partition.

2. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved firestop any annular space between the sleeve and wall opening.

D. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire-rated construction as specified herein.



E. All data, video, and communications cable bundles shall utilize an enclosed fire rated pathway device wherever said cables penetrate rated walls. The fire-rated pathway shall contain a built-in fire sealing system sufficient to maintain the hourly fire rating of the barrier being penetrated. The self-contained sealing system shall automatically adjust to the installed cable loading and shall permit cables to be installed, removed, or retrofitted without the need to adjust, remove or reinstall firestop materials.

3.3 Installation

A. General

1. Installation of Firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation procedures.

2. Apply Firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of Firestop.

B. Field Quality Control

1. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

2. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets.

3. Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition.

4. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities.

5. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost.

C. Calculate the maximum cable fill ratio for each Firestopping System and cable type. Do not exceed the maximum fill ratio.

D. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

3.4 Warranty

A. Comply with General Conditions, and include but not be limited to:

1. Repairs and replacement of penetration seals which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion, resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in submitted manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of the material for exposure indicated.



3.5 Cleaning

A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces.

B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 27 0544-1

SECTION 27 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.




1. After award, convene a pre-installation meeting at least 14 calendar days prior to

commencing related work. The meeting must be scheduled at least 14 days in advance. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of CCHHS section, including other trades and utilities if necessary. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work.

2. Tour, inspect, and discuss building conditions relating to telecommunications system

cabling and equipment, CCHHS telecommunications system requirements, and coordination with existing conditions and other work. Review exact location of each item within building construction, casework, and fixtures, and their requirements.

3. Inspect all telecommunication pathways to verify size and quantity to meet CCHHS

standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 A. B. C.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code


BICSI(Building Industry Consulting Services International) CO-OSP Customer Owned Outside Plant Manual











2.2

SLEEVES

A. All data, video, and communications cable bundles shall utilize an enclosed fire rated pathway device wherever said cables penetrate rated walls. The fire-rated pathway shall contain a built-in fire sealing system sufficient to maintain the hourly fire rating of the barrier being penetrated. The self-contained sealing system shall automatically adjust to the installed cable loading and shall permit cables to be installed, removed, or retrofitted without the need to adjust, remove ore reinstall fire stop materials. The pathway shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems Approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL1479).

1. The CCHHS approved system that meets these specifications is:

Specified Technologies Inc.

EZ-Path system http://www.stifirestop.com

2. Fire Rated Wiring Device System

a. All cable penetrations through floors or fire rated walls shall utilize fire rated device systems that shall be approved by ITS.

All devices shall be heavy-duty specification grade an in tumescent insert material allowing for 0-100 % visual fill of conductors.

b. Fire rated devices shall bear the UL Classification marking.

c. Cables penetrating through fire rated floors or walls shall utilize fire rated pathway devices capable of providing an (F) rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed.

d. Wiring devices shall be capable of allowing a 0-100% fill of cables

e. The installed device shall require no maintenance and accommodate future cable changes without mechanical adjustment and/or removal or replacement of protective materials.

f. Conduit sleeve as means of fire-stopping is not to be utilized in any CCHHS



project. Any exceptions must be approved by CCHHS.

g. All penetrations that do not meet the above specifications must be fire stopped with an appropriate system.

3. Any conduits or other penetrations that a fire stopping system cannot accommodate must be fire stopped with a UL approved system that meets the City of Chicago fire code and is approved by CCHHS.

B. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm > annular clear space between sleeve and

pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed[ or unless seismic criteria require different clearance].

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies. END OF SECTION 27 05 44


IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0533-1

27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 Work Includes

Work covered by this Section shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment and materials necessary for the labeling of the telecommunications infrastructure as described on the Drawings and/or required by these specifications.

1.2 Scope of Work

This Section includes the minimum requirements for the Identification and labeling of the Communications Systems for the project as outlined in the Bid Document.

1.3 Summary

A. Administration of the telecommunications infrastructure includes documentation of cables, termination hardware, patching and cross-connection facilities, conduits, other cable pathways, Telecommunications Rooms, and other telecommunications spaces. All facilities shall apply and maintain a system for documenting and administering the telecommunications infrastructure.

B. The owner maintains a campus wide labeling scheme for voice and data outlets and patch panels.

C. Industry Labeling Standards and Conventions shall be used unless otherwise stated in the bid documents or by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Telecommunications Infrastructure Records must be maintained in a computer spreadsheet, or in a computer database. Paper records are encouraged but are optional. A cable record is prepared for each backbone cable. The record will show the cable name and must describe the origin point and destination point of the cable. The cable record will record what services and/or connections are assigned to each cable pair or strand. An equipment record is prepared for services distributed from a certain piece of equipment, such as a router, or a system such as the telephone system PBX.

E. Installer shall maintain accurate, up-to-date Installation or Construction Drawings. At a minimum, the Installation Drawings shall show pathway locations and routing, configuration of telecommunications spaces including backboard and equipment rack configurations, and wiring details including identifier assignments.

F. Installer shall provide a complete and accurate set of as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall record the identifiers for major infrastructure components including; the pathways, spaces, and wiring portions of the infrastructure which may each may have separate drawings if warranted by the complexity of the installation, or the scale of the drawings.



1.4 Quality Assurance

A. All labels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of labeling that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner or Owner Representative.

B. Labels shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The labels and labeling equipment specified are based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval.

C. Strictly adhere to all Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) recommended installation practices when installing communications/data labeling.

D. Material and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of the current adopted revision of the following:

TIA-606-C Administration Standards for Telecommunications Infrastructure TIA-569 Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces

TIA-568 Telecommunications Cabling Standard BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

UL 969 - UL Standard for Safety for Marking and Labeling Systems

1.5 Submittals

Provide product data for the following: Manufacturers cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all products (submit with bid).

1.6 Coordination

A. Coordinate installation of labels with other trades.

B. Storage and Handling: Avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes. Damaged products will not be installed. Store materials in original cartons and in a clean dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic. Wet materials will be unpacked and dried before storage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

2.2 Labels

A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable

C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label

D. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof even when submerged



E. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Backbone Cable Labels

F. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Horizontal Cable Labels

G. Work Area Copper, Fiber, and Coax Riser Cable Labels

H. Patch Panel Labels

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Identification & Labeling

A. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are easily read. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the infrastructure.

B. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of the labeled component.

C. All labels shall be printed or generated by a mechanical device.

3.2 Telecommunication Identifiers

A. Outside Plant cabling shall be clearly marked using permanent means. Outside plant shall use the following system of numbering and labeling:

1. Fiber Optic:

a. Identify: far-end building name, building number, fiber-type and strand-count

b. Label at entrance and exit points of tunnel system and at conduit entry points between 12 inches and 36 inches from the conduit or at closet point that is clearly visible and long cable length in tunnel at 200-foot intervals.

c. Label at termination panels at both ends 2. Copper:

a. Identify: far-end building name, building number and strand-count

b. Label at entrance and exit points of tunnel system and at conduit entry points between 12 inches and 36 inches from the conduit or at closet point that is clearly visible and long cable length in tunnel at 200-foot intervals

B. Riser cabling shall be clearly marked using permanent means. Riser cabling shall use the following system of numbering and labeling:

1. Fiber Optic:

a. Identify: far-end EF / ER / TR, fiber-type and strand-count.

b. When small facilities are fed from a primary location and treated as an ER, riser shall be labeled similar to Outside Plant Fiber Optic

2. Copper:

a. Identify: far-end EF / ER / TR and pair-count



b. Termination points shall be labeled as to actual pair at every fifth (5th) pair-point.

3.3 Labeling Procedures

A. To be consistent with ANSI/TIA standards and industry practices, it is important that both labeling and color coding be applied to all telecommunications infrastructure components. Labeling with the unique identifier will identify a particular component. Proper color coding will quickly identify how that component is used in the overall telecommunications infrastructure of the facility.

B. Visibility and durability:

1. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are easily read. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the infrastructure.

2. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of the labeled component.

3. Labels are generally of either the adhesive or insert type. All labels must be legible, resistant to defacement, and maintain adhesion to the application surface.

4. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof, even when submerged.

5. Labels applied directly to a cable shall have a clear vinyl wrapping applied over the label and around the cable to permanently affix the label.

6. Other types of labels, such as tie-on labels, may be used. However, the label must be appropriate for the environment in which it is used and must be used in the manner intended by the manufacturer.

7. The contractor shall label the entire communications cabling system for future maintainability and troubleshooting.

8. All station cables shall be labeled at the faceplate, the patch panel jack or port, and the rear of the patch panel above or below the 110 punch down (for UTP) or jack or port position (fiber or coax) indicating location number.

9. The contractor shall coordinate with CCHHS on the layout of the label.

10. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.

11. Both ends of the cable must label with a Brady type label with its permanent cable number.

C. Mechanical generation

1. All labels shall be printed or generated by a mechanical device. 2. Hand written labels are NOT acceptable.



COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS 27 119‐1

Section 27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 Work Includes

A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents.

1.2 Scope of Work

A. This section includes the minimum requirements for Horizontal and Backbone cable terminations installed in communications equipment rooms (Telecommunications Rooms, Equipment Rooms, or “Telecommunications Closets”).

B. Included in this section are the minimum composition requirements and installation methods for the following: Patch Panels

1.3 Quality Assurance

A. All cable and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner or Owner Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval.

B. Strictly adhere to all Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) recommended installation practices when installing communications/data cabling.

C. Material and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of the current adopted revision of the following:

ANSI/TIA-568 Series Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard ANSI/TIA-569 Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ANSI/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual CENELEC EN-50173 - Generic cabling systems ISO/IEC 11801 - Generic cabling for customer premises J-STD-607 Joint Standard for Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications NFPA 70 National Electric Code

1.4 Submittals

A. Provide product data for the following: Manufacturers cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all products (submit with bid).